DIVISION 15 - MECHANICALDIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15035 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ... Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

GermplasmTable of Contents 05-15-12

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

15000 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS15035 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES15055 MOTORS15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING15155 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES15415 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES15485 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS15671 CONDENSING UNITS15725 MODULAR INDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS15761 AIR COILS15815 METAL DUCTS15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES15838 POWER VENTILATORS15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS16051 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL16052 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES16138 LIGHTING CONTROLS16140 WIRING DEVICES16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR16289 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES16420 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS16442 PANELBOARDS16491 FUSES

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2

16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION16721 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 17 – COMMUNICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY17010 DIVISION 17 TECHNOLOGY GENERAL PROVISIONS17110 PATHWAYS AND SPACES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM17120 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM17450 BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS15000 - 1

SECTION 15000

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Mechanical sleeve seals.4. Sleeves.5. Escutcheons.6. Grout.7. Mechanical demolition.8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.9. Concrete bases.10. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spacesabove ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finishedoccupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoorambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physicalcontact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weatherconditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambienttemperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.


1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,"Structural Welding Code-Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electricalcharacteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved inwriting and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes areappropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,equipment shall comply with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials andjoining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listedbelow.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inchmaximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended bypiping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable fluxaccording to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.


2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum workingpressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225deg F.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplasticlining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at225 deg F.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annularspace between pipe and sleeve.

B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include typeand number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

C. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of lengthrequired to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealingelement.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed withwelded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, withplain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.


D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailingflange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID toclosely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD thatcompletely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cementgrout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" forgeneral demolition requirements and procedures.


B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and componentsindicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed andcap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with sameor compatible piping material.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed andplug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatibleductwork material.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and removeequipment.

6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services andremove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, andmake equipment operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services andremove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or isunserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with newproducts of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. All piping shall be made in the United States of America and shall bear label indicatingas such. No imported piping will be accepted.

B. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sectionsspecifying piping systems.

C. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement ofpiping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe andcalculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Installpiping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

D. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except inequipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areasat right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unlessspecifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panelremoval.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install piping at indicated slopes.


I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than systemoperating pressure.

M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-boardpartitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

O. Install sleeve .032 thickness minimum where copper tubing comes in contact withconcrete or masonry sleeving must be sealed to prevent concrete intrusion beforeconcrete is poured.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves andmechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear spacebetween pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipeand sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements toexpand and make watertight seal.

Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeveseals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealingelements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipeand sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements toexpand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer toDivision 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications forroughing-in requirements.


3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sectionsspecifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings beforeassembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper TubeHandbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe andTube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying withAWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrsand restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that arecorroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or openwelds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processesand welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness forservice application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants onbolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe andfittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, andsolvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-numberPVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138

Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.


K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with cleancloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and joinaccording to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at finalconnection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and atfinal connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect pipingmaterials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connectpiping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mountingheights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systemsand components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair orreplacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, withminimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessiblelocations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipmentmanufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 incheslarger in both directions than supported unit.


2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwiseindicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of thebase.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend throughconcrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer'ssetting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished withitems to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supportedequipment.

6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, andelevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, andanchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposedto view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Installfasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and otherequipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.


F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES15035-1

SECTION 15035

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 15010, BASIC MECHANICALREQUIREMENTS are part of this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. General: Provide Variable Frequency Drives of the latest design and technology toprovide adjustable frequency/speed control of motors, as indicated herein and on theConstruction Documents. It is the intention of these specifications that the VFDcontroller shall be completely solid-state variable voltage source design.

B. Chiller Drives: This section specifically does not include variable frequency or speeddrives for Chillers.

1.03 RELATION TO OTHER WORK

A. Related Sections: Other Sections of Division 15 which relate to the requirements of thisSection may include but are not limited to the following:

1. 15050, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS2. 15160, PUMPS3. 15800, WATER CHILLER4. 15800, AIR HANDLING UNIT5. 15860, FANS6. 15950, BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM7. 15990, PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

B. Related Divisions: Other Divisions of these specifications which relate to therequirements of this Section may include but are not limited to the following:

1. Division 1, ALTERNATES2. Division 16, ELECTRICAL


A. Single Manufacturer: All VFD units shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

B. Parts and Service: The VFD Manufacturer shall maintain, as part of a national network,Engineering and Parts service facilities to provide start-up service, emergency servicecalls, repair work, service contracts, maintenance and training of customer personnel.


C. Standards: The VFD shall comply with latest IEEE 519 – “Recommended Practicesand Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems”, and the latestapplicable standards of ANSI, NEMA and the NEC. As a minimum, the full load outputcurrent rating of the drive shall be equal to 1.2 times the equivalent motor horsepowerfull load current (as listed by National Electric Code Table 430-150).

D. Harmonics: The VFD's shall limit harmonic distortion reflected onto the sourcedistribution system to a voltage and current distortion level as defined by IEEE 519.Harmonic calculations shall be provided with submittal. Field testing and certification isrequired as indicated separately in this specification.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submittals shall be provided for all equipment herein specified including alldata concerning dimensions, materials, efficiencies, installation instructions, wiringdiagrams, UL data, and appropriate identification. Submittal shall include, but not belimited to, the following:

1. Catalog cut sheet of each VFD being provided2. Dimension of each VFD3. Detailed documentation of protection devices (fuses, breakers, ground fault

protection, harmonic suppression, surge suppression)4. Factory Test Information5. Information on bypass switch operation and manual starter information6. Short circuit withstand rating of entire VFD assembly (drive and bypass), including

UL testing information/data7. UL Listing / UL File Number8. IEEE 519 Calculations, provided by the VFD manufacturer, indicating calculated

harmonic distortion levels with equipment being provided. Point of commoncoupling shall be at the secondary of the utility company transformer.

9. Warranty Information

B. General: Refer to paragraph entitled “SUBMITTAL” in Section 15010. Include thefollowing material and performance data:

1. Manufacturers Literature:

a. Complete technical information on the Variable Frequency Drive and allspecified options, indicating all cabinet dimensions and space requirementsfor the VFD, including bypass contactors and line reactors.

b. Wiring diagram with all control and power wiring for the Variable FrequencyDrive Unit.

2. Performance Data:


a. Complete efficiency versus load and speed data for all VFD ratings showingthat the VFD with line reactors is capable of providing full motor nameplaterated horsepower.

3. Installation Instructions:

a. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions including copies shipped withthe equipment.

b. Manufacturer's instructions for the installation and checkout procedure forthe variable frequency drive unit.

4. Maintenance Instructions:

a. Manufacturer's printed instructions for the maintenance of the variablefrequency drive unit.

5. Manufacturer's Start-Up, Checkout and Instructions:

a. Start-up and checkout of the variable frequency drive unit.

C. Approval: VFDs shall not be ordered until submittals have been approved by theEngineer and shall bear the submittal approval stamp.

1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Sealing: Openings shall be sealed for shipping and remain so until installation.

B. Handling: The equipment shall be carefully handled, not subjected to shock, andprotected from weather, dust, construction materials and damage.

1.07 FACTORY TESTING AND CALCULATIONS

A. Factory Testing and Warranty: Each VFD shall be factory tested to ensure reliability.Testing shall include component thermal cycling, logic system simulation tests and fullload operation tests. The VFD shall be full load heat tested at 104 degrees F ambient.for a period not less than 4 hours with no component damage. The VFD shall befurnished with manufacturer's written certification of tests conducted and their results.

B. Efficiency Rating: Complete efficiency versus load and speed data for all VFD settingsshall be submitted from factory testing and shall be no less than 95 percent at 100percent speed and 87 percent at 60 percent speed. The VFD's shall maintain the lineside displacement power factor no less than 0.95 regardless of speed and load.

C. Motor Lead Length: It shall be the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to determine ifoutput filters are required based on motor lead lengths. Harmonic filters shall beprovided as needed to achieve the maximum harmonic distortion levels specified herein.


D. Point of Common Coupling: Field testing of each VFD at the point of common couplingis required to determine harmonic feedback onto the distribution system. The harmonicdistortion at this point shall be limited to the voltage and current levels defined by IEEE-519 as outlined below, for "General System" applications. The total accumulation ofharmonic distortion of all drives shall be calculated. A written and sealed report is to beissued by a Registered Engineer at the conclusion of the tests and if the equipment asinstalled has been found not to be in compliance with IEEE-519, the VFD's shall beremoved at the supplier's expense and promptly replaced with conforming equipment forwhich testing procedure shall be repeated and documented in the same manner, allwithout additional cost to Owner.

E. Allowable Distortion Limits: Total at point of verification for Project for all assemblies:

1. Voltage: 5% = 100 x Total Harmonic Voltage (total units)Fundamental Voltage

2. Notch depth and notch volt - microseconds as defined by the latest edition of IEEE519 Standard.

3. Maximum harmonic current distortion in percent of fundamental shall be per IEEE519 for specific count pulse unit

4. Use of isolation and filter devices is assumed by this specification, as required toobtain specified performance.

5. Harmonic calculations shall be based on the kVA capacity and impedance of thetransformer supplying the equipment power voltage. The Contractor shall supplythis information to the VFD Manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: The VFD shall be as produced by one of the following manufacturers.Other manufacturers are not acceptable and will not be considered.

1. Square D2. ABB3. Toshiba4. Allen Bradley5. York International6. Cutler Hammer

B. Requirements: VFD manufacturers listed here are not automatically approved for thisproject. All requirements of these specifications must be fully met for the VFD to beapproved.


2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

A. General: The Variable Frequency Drive shall be capable of converting the input voltagefrom to variable frequency, three phase AC power for variable torque motor controlcontinuously from 10 percent to 100 percent of base speed. A transformer shall not beused to adjust the input or output voltage. All general options and modifications shallmount within the VFD enclosure. The voltage-to-frequency ratio shall be automaticallyadjusted to maximize energy savings.

B. Duty: The adjustable frequency system shall be continuous centrifugal duty stepless VFDmatched to the motors provided with the equipment (i.e. fans and pumps). The VFD's shallbe capable of operating any motor, regardless of manufacturer, with a load rating withinthe capacity of the VFD's.

C. Microprocessor Based: The VFD's shall provide a microprocessor-based adjustment ofthree-phase motors.

D. Pulse: The VFD's shall be of the 6 pulse for motor HP <100 and 12 pulse or greater formotor HP > 100, Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility inputvoltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-stepoperation. VFD's utilizing a third power section are not acceptable. .

E. Operating Conditions: Standard operating conditions shall be:

1. Incoming Power: Specified Voltage +5% to -10% and 60 hertz +/-2 hertz power toa fixed potential DC bus level.

2. Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing and non-corrosive (indoor applications).

3. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet above sea level.

4. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C (indoor applications).

F. Rotating Motor: The VFD's shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFD's shallbe able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation withouttripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the VFD's shall start into themotor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then acceleratethe motor in the preset method of starting.

G. Housing: VFD's located in dry interior spaces shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure;VFDs located outside or in damp locations shall be provided with NEMA 3Rweatherproof enclosure.

H. Power Factor: Power Factor Correction capacitors shall not be utilized to meet motorperformance criteria.


I. Front Door: The front door of the controller shall include a door interlock disconnectswitch. This shall prevent opening of the unit until the disconnect is in off position.Input fuses shall be provided.

J. Manual Reset: The output power circuitry of the unit shall include a manual reset motoroverload relay interlocked with the "on" circuitry of the unit. This shall be an adjustablesolid-state device to allow easy field adjustment to motor nameplate amps.

K. Minimum Withstand Rating: The entire Variable Frequency Drive assembly (drive,bypass and all components) shall be capable of a minimum withstand rating asindicated on the electrical drawings, for a minimum 3-cycles. The VFD assemblynameplate shall indicate that the entire assembly (not individual components) is ratedat this minimum withstand rating. Test data indicating that the entire assembly hasbeen tested to this rating shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.

L. UL Listing: The entire Variable Frequency Drive assembly (drive, bypass and allcomponents) shall be UL-listed as a single assembly. Individual component listingsonly shall not be acceptable. UL test data indicating that the entire assembly has beentested and approved by UL shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.

2.03 CONTROL AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS

A. General: All VFD's programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digitaloperator keypad located on the front door of the VFD or equivalent, convenientarrangement without opening the front door. Parameters shall include:

1. Programmable maximum and minimum frequency.

2. Programmable acceleration and deceleration times.

3. Selectable carrier frequencies, V/Hz, and critical frequency avoidance lockout.

4. Adjustable electronic overload and torque limits.

5. Multiple attempt restart.

6. Keypad lockout and factory default overrides.

B. Display: The VFD's shall have a minimum of 8 character display indicating monitoredfunctions as described in the proceeding paragraph. The following parameters shall bemonitored:

1. Input current, RMS (3 phases)2. Input voltage, RMS (3 phases)3. Output current, RMS (3 phases)4. Output voltage, RMS (3 phases)5. Output frequency6. Kilowatts (input and output)


7. Drive temperature8. Time9. Date

10. Elapsed time meter11. Motor rpm

C. Additional Features: The VFD's shall be additionally equipped with a digital operatorstation mounted on the enclosure. Control operator devices and indication lights shallinclude:

1. Digital speed control.2. Hand-Off-Auto control selector switch.3. LED status lights for HOA position.4. Local - remote speed control selector switch.5. LED status lights for local - remote switch position.6. LED status lights for run, fault, alarm, up-to-speed, and drive-ready status.

D. Interface: The VFD's shall include the following system interfaces:

1. Two (2) isolated process control speed reference interfaces to receive and isolate0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mAdc signals.

2. One (1) analog output signal 0-10 Vdc for external metering.3. One (1) analog output signal 4-20mA for external metering.4. Run relay with an isolated set of form C contacts.5. Dedicated terminal blocks for interface with remote start contact and remote

safety trips.6. 120 VAC control to allow VFD's to interface with remote contacts at a distance up

to 500 feet and with three wire control.7. Unit mounted display indicating monitored and drive diagnostic information in

English language. Coded messages are not acceptable.8. Dry contact output to indicate protective function trip.9. A 0 to 5 volt DC signal shall be provided for future use. A 4-20mA signal shall be

provided for interface to controls system. The signals shall vary in directproportion to the controller speed.

10. The unit shall have a dedicated terminal block to allow the controller to beinterconnected with external shutdown contacts, such as a smoke detector, firedetector, or time clock. If the unit is shut down by a remote alarm circuit (notincluding the time clock), a door mounted "external fault" light shall light.

E. H-O-A Switch: The front door of the unit shall have a "hand/off/auto" switch.

1. When the switch is in the hand position, the unit shall be enabled and thepotentiometer shall control speed.

2. When the switch is in "auto" position, the controller shall be started and stoppedby a contract closure, and the speed shall be controlled by an input control signal.


3. In the auto position, the speed of the unit shall be controlled by a SPDT Nullcontroller. If the sensor indicates that the speed is below required speed (i.e., thepressure is too low) the controller shall increase in speed.

4. Conversely, when in the auto position, if the sensor indicates that the setpoint is beingexceeded (i.e., the pressure is too high), the controller shall decrease in speed. If nosignal is made, the controller shall remain at constant speed.

5. When the switch is in the “off” position, the motor shall be disconnected and shallnot run.

F. Acceleration/Deceleration: Acceleration time from 0 to full speed shall be adjustablefrom 30 to 300 seconds. Deceleration time shall be independently adjustable for thesame range. A maximum frequency (speed) adjustment shall be available to allow lessthan 50 Hz output. A minimum frequency adjustment shall be available to set aminimum output frequency.

2.04 PROTECTION

A. General: The VFD's shall be provided with means to protect itself and the motor fromthe following “faults”:

1. Overload2. Speed compensated overcurrent.3. In-rush current limit (adjustable 50 to 150%)4. Undervoltage and Overvoltage5. Overtemperature6. Short Circuit (3-phase and line-to-line)7. Ground fault8. Input and output phase loss9. Overfrequency

B. Overload Protection: The VFD's shall be protected from momentary overload /overcurrent conditions as indicated below:

1. The VFD shall have a one (1) minute overload current rating of 110% for variabletorque loads or motor supplied. Unit capacities shall match equipment asminimum, increased to allow normal equipment overloads in actual installation.The VFD and its associated equipment shall be considered as an integral unit forperformance as required by this Project.

2. A current limiter shall be provided. The current limiter shall be designed to functionautomatically to prevent over current trip due to momentary overload conditions,allowing the inverter to continue operation, and achieve full design capacity of themotor and connected load.


C. Overcurrent Protection: The line side of the VFD's shall be equipped with a currentlimiting reactor to reduce the amount of fault current to the VFD's, which is coordinatedwith available AIC at service.

D. Overcurrent Trip: The instantaneous overcurrent trip shall safely limit the output currentin proper microseconds interval due to phase short circuit or severe overloadconditions.

E. Undervoltage/Overvoltage/Phase Loss: An undervoltage trip shall protect the inverterdue to non-momentary power or phase loss. The undervoltage trip shall activateautomatically when the line voltage drops 15% below rated input voltage. Theovervoltage trip shall protect the inverter due to voltage levels in excess of its rating.

F. Temperature / Thermal Overload: An over temperature trip shall protect the inverterfrom elevated temperatures in excess of its rating.

1. The over temperature light or indication on digital display shall indicate if the unit istripped on over temperature.

2. When the internal temperature is reduced to an acceptable level, the unit shallautomatically start.

3. The VFD panel shall provide visual indication when conditions are within 10degrees F. of over-temperature shutdown, and upon shutdown.

4. Motor Thermal Overload Protection shall be provided with door mounted resetbutton for the exact motor full load amps.

5. Motor thermal overload relay shall be mounted inside the VFD cabinet.

G. Short Circuit: In the event of a phase to phase short circuit, the control shall bedesigned to shut down safely without component failure.

H. Ground Fault: Solid-state ground-fault protection and indication shall be provided withthe VFD.

I. Restart: The inverter logic shall allow that a trip condition resulting from over-current,under-voltage, or over-voltage shall automatically reset, and the inverter shallautomatically restart upon correction of the trip condition. The number of restartattempts shall be limited to 5. If after 5 attempts the restart is not successful, theinverter shall shutdown safely and require manual restart.

J. Loss of Power: In the event of a power loss, the control shall be designed to shutdownsafely without component failure. Upon return of power, the system shall be designedto automatically return to normal operation (if the start is in the on condition) being ableto restart into a rotating motor and regain positive speed control without shutdown orcomponent failure.

K. Switching: In the event that an input or output power contactor, disconnect switch, orcircuit breaker is opened or closed while the control is activated, no damage to the unitshall result.


2.05 BYPASS MOTOR CONTROLLER REQUIREMENT

A. Starter: VFD assembly shall contain a separate, across-the-line magnetic starter, sizedto match motor and arranged for manually-activated emergency use in event of VFDsystem failure, controlled by same input data as VFD system.

B. Bypass: The front door shall include the manual bypass switch. The bypass sectiondoor shall include a "VFD-Off-Bypass" selector switch, a "VFD Mode" indicator light anda "Bypass Mode" indicator light. Terminals shall be provided for remote indication ofmode selection. In bypass mode the motor shall run at full speed directly from normalpower. No electronic circuit shall be employed in the bypass mode. Motor protectionthermal overload shall be provided in "bypass" and "normal" mode.

C. Transfer: Manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to safely transfer themotor from the VFD to the power line, or from the line to the controller, while the motoris at zero speed. The bypass shall not be located in the VFD section of the cabinet.The bypass section of the cabinet shall house all devices which must be energized ateither line or control voltage while operating in the bypass mode.

D. Contactors: Two motor contactors, electrically interlocked, shall be utilized. Onecontactor is to be between the VFD output and the motor, controlled by the VFDregulator; and the other one is to be between the bypass power line and the motor,providing across-the-line starting. The 115 VAC relay control logic, allowing commonstart-stop commands in the "controller" mode and the "bypass" mode shall also beincluded within the bypass enclosure.

E. Interlock: The bypass option shall include a door interlocked, main power inputdisconnect, providing positive shutdown of all input power to both the bypass circuitryand the VFD.

F. Factory Installed: Manual bypass with magnetic contactors shall be factory installed.Field modification of the VFD to provide manual bypass is not permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. General: Provide Variable Frequency Drive for each motor identified as requiring aVFD or variable speed operation.

B. Mounting: Floor mounted variable frequency drive units shall be installed onhousekeeping pads. Refer to paragraph entitled "HOUSEKEEPING PADS ANDEQUIPMENT SUPPORTS" in Section 15050.

C. Wiring Diagrams: The VFD shall be provided with all necessary wiring diagrams forinstallation and power wiring from the manufacturer.


D. Coordination: Coordinate each VFD with the motor served and with the ControlsSystem, paying specific attention to the signal input/output and the ground source.

E. Startup: The VFD manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost to the owner, astart-up service package by a factory trained field service engineer for all VFDsprovided. Service shall include inspection, final adjustments, operational checks,functional checks of spare parts (if provided) and a final report for record purpose.Start-up service shall be provided for each VFD. Start-up shall be performed with thecooperation of the controls sub-contractor, where applicable.

F. Disconnect: Where a remote disconnect is provided for a motor controlled by a VFD,coordinate to ensure that a late make, early break auxiliary contact rated for ten (10)amps continuous duty is provided on the disconnect. This auxiliary contact must bewired into the VFD start circuit to ensure shut-down of the VFD in the event of thedisconnect being opened.

G. Warranty: The service package shall include a comprehensive (replacement parts andlabor) two-year warranty from date of Owner Acceptance or Substantial Completion(whichever is later) for all VFDs provided.

3.02 LOCATION OF VFD

A. Location: The contractor shall coordinate the exact location of VFD with fieldconditions, keeping in mind that the locations shown on the construction drawings arediagrammatic.

B. Distance from Motor: The maximum distance each VFD can be located from the motorit controls shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Mounting: VFD may be mounted directly to masonry, CMU or concrete walls usingappropriate fastening methods. When the wall is an exterior wall or any wall wherecondensation may occur, provide appropriate stand-off (i.e., insulation and/or unistrutmount). VFD may be mounted directly to equipment such as factory or field built AHU.

D. Unistrut: When VFD is required to be located where suitable walls are not available,provide a Unistrut type frame securely mounted to the floor and adequately braced toform a rigid mounting surface.

E. Floor Mounting: Provide 4” concrete housekeeping pad for all floor mounted units.Pad shall be 6” larger than VFD on all sides and shall have chamfered corners.

F. Clearance: VFD shall be generally mounted with the center of the unit at a maximum of60" above the finished floor. VFD's shall be accessible per the manufacturer'srecommendations Service clearance shall be provided in accordance with NEC andunder no circumstances less than the following:


Voltage to Ground Min. Clearance Distance

0-120 V 3'-0"121-277 V 4'-0"greater than 277 V 5'-0"

3.03 AIR HANDLING UNIT SHUTDOWN

A. Shutdown: When the VFD is used for control of an air handling unit or exhaust fan thatis required to shut down upon activation of the fire alarm system, the VFD controllershall be connected to the fire alarm system and shall de-energize the VFD when thefire alarm system is in alarm. Coordinate with Division 16.

B. H-O-A: The VFD shall be de-energized in “hand”, “off”, and “auto” modes. Switchingbetween modes shall not reactivate motor until the fire alarm system is reset.

C. Bypass: The VFD shall be de-energized in “VFD” and “Bypass” modes. Switchingbetween modes shall not reactivate motor until the fire alarm system is reset.

D. Restart: Upon reset of the fire alarm system and re-activation of the VFD, the motorshall “soft-start” and shall ramp up to its designated speed over a minimum of 30seconds.

3.04 TRAINING

A. Training: Provide a minimum of 16 hours of training for all VFDs for the Owner andOwner’s maintenance personnel.

END OF SECTION

MOTORS15055-1

SECTION 15055

MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. See Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls" for mounting motors andvibration isolation and seismic-control devices.

C. See individual Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motorrequirements for motor-driven equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features thatcomply with the following:1. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.2. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control

sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:

1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified inanother Section.

MOTORS15055-2

2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, orcharacteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performancespecified.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.

B. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase.

C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltageto which motor is connected.

E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300feet above sea level.

G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operateconnected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, withindicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or consideringservice factor.

H. Enclosure: Open dripproof.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: NEMA “Premium” efficiency, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.

D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrustloading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

MOTORS15055-3

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than7.5 hp.

1. Finish: Gray enamel.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirementsfor controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suitedto control method.

B. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greasedbearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated withnon-hygroscopic material.

1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motorapplication:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit tomotor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature ratingof motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motortemperature returns to normal range.

D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forceson motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

END OF SECTION

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS15060-1

SECTION 15060

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Metal framing systems.4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.5. Fastener systems.6. Equipment supports.

B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates fortrapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

C. See Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for fire protection piping.

D. See Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration" for vibration isolation devices.

E. See Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts” for duct hangers and supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangersand Supports."

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supportedsystems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight ofsupported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Design hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.


2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations forthe following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirementsapply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Referto Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hangerand support types.

B. Available Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.5. Empire Industries, Inc.6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.8. Grinnell Corp.


9. GS Metals Corp.10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.12. PHS Industries, Inc.13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.14. Tolco Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion forsupport of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assemblymade from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steelchannels and other components.


1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.3. GS Metals Corp.4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.6. Tolco Inc.7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased insheet metal shield.


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.


2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.3. PHS Industries, Inc.4. Pipe Shields, Inc.5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vaporbarrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumferenceof pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating belowambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portlandcement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supportedloads and building materials where used.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.d. MKT Fastening, LLC.e. Powers Fasteners.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use inhardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacitiesappropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.b. Empire Industries, Inc.c. Hilti, Inc.d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.e. MKT Fastening, LLC.f. Powers Fasteners.


2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made fromstructural-steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black andgalvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrinkand nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying pipingsystems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are notspecified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipmentthat will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachmentsare in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except asspecified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulatedor insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg Fpipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspensionof pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches ofinsulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulatedstationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.


6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30,from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction mightoccur.

8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, iflongitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur butvertical adjustment is not necessary.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified inpiping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavyloads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment tosuspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flangeof beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flangeof beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams ifloads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.


J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pipingsystem Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids withinsulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing bymanufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified inpiping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does notexceed 1-1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hangerwith springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load andlimit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of pipingsystem from base support.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that arenot specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that arenot specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of buildingattachments where required in concrete construction.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Installhangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support pipingfrom building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrangefor grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricatedtrapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipesize or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specifiedabove for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads beingsupported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping andsupport together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.


E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed andcompletely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated toolmanufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer'soperating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed andcompletely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems,to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Installadditional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete insertsbefore concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars throughopenings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads andstresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and somaximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9(for building services piping) are not exceeded.

M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may projectthrough insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hangershield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power pipingand ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrieris indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:


a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or tosupport equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearingsurface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers andequipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections thatcannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, andwith the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength andcorrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and toachieve indicated slope of pipe.


3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areasimmediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used forshop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-paintedsurfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS15071 - 1

SECTION 15071

MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation mounts.2. Freestanding spring isolators.3. Elastomeric hangers.4. Spring hangers.5. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.6. Thrust limits.7. Pipe riser resilient supports.8. Resilient pipe guides.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation deviceindicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators andfor designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipatedexpansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on buildingstructure, and spring deflection changes. Include certification that riser systemhas been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages andattachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motorslides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission,component misalignment, and cantilever loads.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "StructuralWelding Code--Steel."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the followingrequirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products bythe manufacturers specified.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Ace Mounting Co., Inc.2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.3. B-Line Systems, Inc.4. California Dynamics Corp.5. Isolation Technology, Inc.6. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.7. Mason Industries, Inc.8. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.9. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.10. Vibration Mountings & Controls/Korfund.

B. Elastomeric Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber orneoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting toequipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identifyto indicate capacity range.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height ofthe spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floorload to 100 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and capscrew to fasten and level equipment.


D. Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber orneoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections forhanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

E. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with springand insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow fora maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding orreducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

F. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow fora maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding orreducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert incompression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching toequipment.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for amaximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducingisolation efficiency.



deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.


7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inchmovement at start and stop.

H. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene.Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel inboth directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

I. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by aminimum of 1/2-inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with ashear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pinshall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guidesshall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7Section "Roof Accessories."

B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.

C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchorlocations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharpedges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-ironclamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchorlocations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hangingequipment. Do not weld angles to rods.

E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect isolator clearance.2. Test isolator deflection.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operatingweight.


B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normaloperating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they areout of contact during normal operation.

C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inchmovement during start and stop.

D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.

E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

F. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendationsto resist seismic forces.

3.4 VIBRATION ISOLATOR SCHEDULE

1. Refer to all equipment (power ventilators, split system A/C units, etc.) and pipingspecification sections to determine which type of vibration isolation to use foreach specific piece of equipment and piping system.

END OF SECTION

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION15075-1

SECTION 15075

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and theirinstallation:

1. Equipment nameplates.2. Equipment markers.3. Equipment signs.4. Access panel and door markers.5. Pipe markers.6. Duct markers.7. Valve tags.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of PipingSystems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles ofidentification devices for piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanentattachment on equipment.

1. Data:

a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.c. Labels of tested compliances.

2. Location: Accessible and visible.3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.


B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,permanent adhesive.

1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.2. Data:

a. Name and plan number.b. Equipment service.c. Design capacity.d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving

conditions, and speed.

3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6inches for equipment.

C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminateengraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melaminesubcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provideholes for mechanical fastening.

1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match

equipment identification.3. Thickness: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent

adhesive.

D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, withabbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inchcenter hole for attachment.

1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanentadhesive.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicatingservice, and showing direction of flow.

1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary

for each application length.3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers

extending 360 deg rees around pipe at each location.4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or

strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required forlabel.

5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate bothdirections; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.


B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover fullcircumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially covercircumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do notpenetrate insulation vapor barrier.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches:3/4 inch minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantityof airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,permanent adhesive.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviationand 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass.2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. Ifmore than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications,selection is Installer's option.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item ofmechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that isdamaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible andvisible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:


1. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, hot water heaters.2. Pumps, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.3. Coils, evaporators, and similar equipment.4. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.5. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.

B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item ofmechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, andmarkers may be omitted if both are indicated.

1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionatelylarger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements,indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improperoperations, and identify units.

3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the followinggeneral categories of equipment:

a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardousunits such as gas outlets.

b. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.c. Fuel-burning units, including hot water heaters.d. Pumps, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.e. Coils, evaporators and similar equipment.f. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.g. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.h. Tanks and pressure vessels.i. Strainers, filters, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

C. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major itemof mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.

1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following colorcodes:

a. Green: For cooling equipment and components.b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components.c. Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.

2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionatelylarger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements,indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improperoperations, and identify units.


4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:

a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardousunits such as gas outlets.

b. Fuel-burning units, including hot water heaters.c. Pumps, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.d. Coils, evaporators, and similar equipment.e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.g. Tanks and pressure vessels.h. Strainers, filters, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Installwith flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.

1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipemarkers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipemarkers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide,lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering fullcircumference of pipe.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers.Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipemarkers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide,lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering fullcircumference of pipe.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces;machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, andplenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

markers.


3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Green: For supply ducts.2. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.3. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionatelylarger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

B. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximumintervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removableceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves;valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoffvalves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVACterminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. Listtagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and colorscheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.c. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Blue.b. Hot Water: Red.c. Gas: Yellow.

3. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: White.b. Hot Water: White.c. Gas: Black.


3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visuallyblocked by other work.

B. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices.

END OF SECTION

MECHANICAL INSULATION15080-1

SECTION 15080

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct, equipment, and pipe, includingthe following:

1. Insulation Materials:

a. Cellular glass.b. Flexible elastomeric.c. Mineral fiber.d. Polyolefin.e. Polystyrene.

2. Fire-rated insulation systems.3. Insulating cements.4. Adhesives.5. Mastics.6. Sealants.7. Factory-applied jackets.8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.9. Field-applied jackets.10. Tapes.11. Securements.12. Corner angles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:

1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type ofinsulation and hanger.

2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.6. Application of field-applied jackets.7. Application at linkages of control devices.


8. Field application for each equipment type.

C. Field quality-control inspection reports.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products perASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, andcement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing andinspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the productsspecified.



2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materialsshall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a bleachable chloridecontent of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.


D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptableaccording to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in themanufacturing process.

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed,rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified inPart 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Available Products:

a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 1.6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ ASJ-SSL: Comply with

ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply withASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosettingresin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.


I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosettingresin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenumapplications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. For equipment applications,provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements arespecified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.g. .

J. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply withASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II,Grade 1 for sheet materials.


a. Armacell LLC; Tubolit.b. Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and NOMAPLY.c. RBX Corporation; Therma-cell.

K. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermalinsulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity(k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging.Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.

2.3 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Description: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is ULtested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating.

1. Products:a. Nelson Firestop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket.b. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.c. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.d. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.e. Vesuvius; PYROSCAT FP FASTR Duct Wrap.

2.4 INSULATING CEMENTS


A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply withASTM C 449/C 449M.


a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.5 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and forbonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with aservice temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Available Products:a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding

Adhesive.


c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.

2.6 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates:Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on belowambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dryfilm thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambientservices.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry filmthickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

2.7 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:


1. Available Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Available Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-70.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46.c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

3. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.4. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.6. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: White.

2.8 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS


A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesivecovered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylenebacking; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially orientedbarrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according toASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

6. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxiallyoriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according toASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

7. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.

a. Available Products:

1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film andSaran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

8. Vinyl Jacket: UL-rated white vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when testedaccording to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A andNFPA 90B.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwiseindicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting andforming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.


2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.3. Color: White.4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanicaljoints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,Temper H-14.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Factory cut and rolled to size.3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper.5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper.6. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows.c. Tee covers.d. Flange and union covers.e. End caps.f. Beveled collars.g. Valve covers.h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

D. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- thick vapor barrier and waterproofingmembrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glassfiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.


a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap.b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125.

2.10 TAPES


A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylicadhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.

1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylicadhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.

1. Width: 3 inches.2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 2 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylicadhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 6 mils.3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 500 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.

1. Width: 2 inches.2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.4. Elongation: 5 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.

B. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded toprojecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securelyin position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the followingrequirements:

1. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2inches square.


2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstratedcapability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated withoutdamaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

C. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplatefastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thicknessindicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Complywith the following requirements:

1. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.2. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated withoutdamaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

D. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that iscapable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicatedwhen self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-

diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.3. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

E. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securelyin place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insertto ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

F. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely inplace but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

G. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steelor Monel.

H. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.12 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according toASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.


B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum accordingto ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materialsthat will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply withrequirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be incontact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and evensurfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, andpiping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation with tightly butted joints free of voids and gaps. Vapor barriers shallbe continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.

C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknessesrequired for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified ininsulation system schedules.

D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacketin either wet or dry state.

E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, andspecialties.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and jointswith adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.


K. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, andpenetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections withvapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment tostructure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barriermastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Sealinsulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommendedby insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Installshields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,support, and shield.

L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rateand wet and dry film thicknesses.

M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staplesalong both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation withlongitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 incheso.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation materialmanufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams andjoints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of itsnominal thickness.

O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations andcracking due to thermal movement.

P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damagedareas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, andseal patches similar to butt joints.

Q. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.


2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Manholes.5. Handholes.6. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roofpenetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoorinsulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoorinsulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches belowtop of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulationflush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulationcontinuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoorinsulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoorinsulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashingat least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not FireRated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulationcontinuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminateinsulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap ductinsulation at least 2 inches.

1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:


1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not firerated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at firedamper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to matchadjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2inches.

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section

"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.4 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive andinsulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates perunit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings andtransitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sidesof vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins alonglongitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulationend joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 incheso.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Installadditional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts andplenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tapematching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install acontinuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seamsand end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end ofinsulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inchoutward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintainvapor-barrier seal.


b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic appliedin a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, andover the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a widthequal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and endjoints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 incheso.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulationsection for each surface.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulationsurface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secureon alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 incheso.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive andinsulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates perunit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings andtransitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sidesof vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins alonglongitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulationend joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 incheso.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Installadditional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts andplenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tapematching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install acontinuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seamsand end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end ofinsulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inchoutward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintainvapor-barrier seal.


b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic appliedin a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, andover the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a widthequal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulationsection for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely aspossible to outside and inside radius of elbows.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulationsurface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secureon alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 incheso.c.

3.5 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except wheremore specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installationarticles.

B. Secure single-layer insulation with bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands withoutdeforming insulation materials.

C. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches.Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layerwith bands at 12-inch intervals.

D. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialtieswith continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of insulating cement and coat with amastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather masticfor above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowelthe mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

F. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexibleelastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves,flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers toadjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

G. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."Match size and color of pipe labels.

H. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tightenbands without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints betweenhalf sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.


2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, andprotrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, securelaps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staplelongitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape asrecommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barriermastic.

5. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do notstaple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive asrecommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barriermastic and flashing sealant.

I. Special Installation Requirements for Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Insulation:

1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommendedadhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surfacebeing insulated.

2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

a. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.b. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,

plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.c. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheetinsulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

d. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer'srecommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allowpassage of air to surface being insulated.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams andend joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top andbottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lapand the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams andend joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints withweatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket withstainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

C. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipeinsulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.


2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with oneend overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with anapproximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adherelap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences ofappropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation.Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to useadhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application ofadhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulationsystems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allowsfor longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lapseal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lapseal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tearand wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tapeedges.

3.7 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and ducthangers and supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systemsare specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.8 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material:Paint jacket as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

1. Apply two finish coats of interior, flat, latex-emulsion size over a primer that iscompatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent torender fabric mildew proof.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply twocoats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visualinspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum jackets.



A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-appliedjacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent ofinspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the"Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removingfield-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipmentdefined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment,remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, byremoving field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of theirinstallation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straightpipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, twolocations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, threelocations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipeservice defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspectionreveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.

C. Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed forinspection. Repeat inspection procedures after new materials are installed.

3.10 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.3. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.4. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.4. Flexible connectors.5. Vibration-control devices.6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.7. Double wall pre-insulated metal duct systems.

3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket 2 inchesthick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.


B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket 2 inchesthick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket 2 inchesthick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

D. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiberboard, 2 inches thickand 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

E. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiberboard, 2 inches thickand 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

F. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 2 inches thickand 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses areidentified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material islisted for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.13 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Flexible elastomeric or mineral-fiber pipeinsulation, Type I Polyolefin, 1 inch thick.

B. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops forPlumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Flexible elastomeric Polyolefin, 1/2 inchthick.

C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric 1 inch thick.

D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.

3.14 OUTDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distributionSections.

B. Domestic Water Piping: Insulation shall be any of the following:

1. Flexible elastomeric, 2 inches thick.2. Polyolefin, 2 inches thick.3. Polystyrene, 2 inches thick.

C. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be any of the following:


1. Flexible elastomeric, 2 inches thick.2. Polyolefin, 2 inches thick.

D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be any of the following:


E. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 2 inches thick.

F. Condensate Piping:


3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, installthe field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. PVC, 20 mils thick.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC, 20 mils thick.

3.16 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET

A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buriedjacket over insulation material.

END OF SECTION

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING15140-1

SECTION 15140

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.

B. All piping shall be made in the United States of America and shall bear label indicatingas such. No imported piping will be accepted.

C. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.

D. See Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping outside the buildingfrom source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.

E. See Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, andfittings.

F. See Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube,fitting, and joining materials.

B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or othermanufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and endscompatible with, piping to be joined.

C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types A and B), watertube, annealed temper.


1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. FurnishClass 300 flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, withball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threadedends.

D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, ASTM B 88M, Types B, water tube, drawntemper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. FurnishClass 300 flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, withball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threadedends.

2.2 VALVES

A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

C. Full port domestic port stainless steel ball valves where possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating maybe used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Under-Building-Slab, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer toDivision 2 Section "Water Distribution."

D. Domestic Water Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the Building: Use any ofthe following piping materials for each size range:


1. NPS 4” to NPS 6”: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; andsoldered joints.

E. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4”and Smaller: Under slab joints and piping to be minimized. Seamless copper tube,Type K; with no under slab joints and no restriction such as kinks.

F. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each sizerange:

1. NPS 1” and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; andsoldered joints.

2. NPS 1-1/4” and NPS 1-1/2”: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings;and soldered joints.

3. NPS 2”: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.4. NPS 2-1/2” to NPS 3-1/2”: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings;

and soldered joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are notindicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2” and smaller. Use gatevalves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2” and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2” and smaller.Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2” and larger.

3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.5. Provide two foot access for all shutoff valves in ceiling.6. All valves must be accessible and reachable by ladder.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbingfixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply toplumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2” andsmaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2” and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontalpiping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "BasicMechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."


C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipepenetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber linksrequired to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals arespecified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee withvalve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gagesare specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages," and drain valves andstrainers are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "BasicMechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers andSupports." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4” and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1” and NPS 1-1/4”: 72” inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2” and NPS 2”: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2”: 108 inches with 1/2”-inch rod.


F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

B. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting tojoin dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extendand connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but notsmaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "PlumbingFixtures."

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller thanequipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2” and larger.


A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected andapproved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities and facilities management having jurisdictionat least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified belowin presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealingor closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdictionto observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance withrequirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test orinspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities havingjurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not airbound and that piping is full of water.


2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that havebeen altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submitseparate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered andunconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that wascovered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operatingpressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. If afixture cannot take pressure it must be valved off to test piping. Isolate testsource and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressureconstitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereofuntil satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping using purging and disinfectingprocedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeatprocedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

END OF SECTION

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES15145 - 1

SECTION 15145

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers.2. Backflow preventers.3. Water pressure-reducing valves.4. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.5. Strainers.6. Hose bibbs.7. Wall hydrants.8. Drain valves.9. Water hammer arresters.10. Trap-seal primer valves.

B. See Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.

C. See Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters forwater coolers.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unlessotherwise indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data.


A. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;Sections 1 through 9."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001.3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.4. Body: Bronze.5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.6. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:


a. Prier Products, Inc.b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.c. Woodford Manufacturing Company.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001.3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.5. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.2 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves (MV):

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide theproduct indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Bradley Corporationc. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.d. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.


e. Symmons Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1017.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.4. Type: Exposed-mounting thermostatically controlled water mixing valve.5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water

supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle.8. Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.9. Tempered-Water Setting: 110 Deg. F.10. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.11. Piping Finish: Copper.

2.3 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2” and smaller.3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2” and smaller.4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2” and Smaller: 0.020 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.4 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs (HB):

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.2. Body Material: Bronze.3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum

breaker complying with ASSE 1011.8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.10. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Operating key.11. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.


2.5 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Moderate-Climate Wall Hydrants (WH-1 and WH-2):

1. Wall hydrants to have ball valve for service.2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

a. Josam Company.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.d. Woodford Manufacturing Company.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.5. Operation: Loose key.6. Inlet: NPS 3/4.7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker or nonremovable hose-

connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011; and garden-hose threadcomplying with ASME B1.20.7.

8. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover.9. Box and Cover Finish: WH-1 Polished nickel bronze and WH-2 Chrome plated.10. Operating Keys(s): One Two with each wall hydrant.

2.6 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.3. Size: NPS 3/4”.4. Body: Copper alloy.5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:



a. AMTROL, Inc.b. Josam Company.c. PPP Inc.d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.3. Type: Copper tube with piston.4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipingjoining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves oninlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install thermometers.

C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducingvalve, and pump.

D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

E. Install lavatory waste-type, trap-seal primer with outlet piping pitched down towarddrain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

F. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawingsindicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

G. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipmentnameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Water pressure-reducing valves.2. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.

H. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicatesafety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, inaddition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section"Mechanical Identification."



A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest asspecified above.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixingvalves.

END OF SECTION

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING15150 - 1

SECTION 15150

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent pipinginside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Special pipe fittings.

B. All piping shall be made in the United States of America and shall bear label indicatingas such. No imported piping will be accepted.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimumworking pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials,"for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste,and vent piping; and "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Cast Iron only to be used aboveground.

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.


1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing,corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; andASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steelshield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564,rubber sleeve.

D. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: Underground only; ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste, andvent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain,waste, and vent patterns.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings maybe used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwiseindicated.

C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4” and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; andcompression joints.

2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steelcouplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

D. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 5” and larger shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4” and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; andcompression joints.


2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steelcouplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

F. Underground, soil and waste Piping NPS 5” and larger shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 2 Section "SanitarySewerage."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "BasicMechanical Materials and Methods."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect tobuilding sanitary sewers.

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipepenetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber linksrequired to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals arespecified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

E. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundationwall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified inDivision 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

F. No threaded plugs exposed to elements.

G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsHandbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping usingappropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep1/4” bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is fromhorizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixturesare installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees,elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow morethan 90 degrees.

I. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes areconnected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.


J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install trueto grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub endsof piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's writteninstructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unlessotherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS2” and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 2-1/2” andlarger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow forpiping NPS 2” and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for pipingNPS 2-1/2” and larger.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

L. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

M. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved byauthorities having jurisdiction.



B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe andFittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

C. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type,unless otherwise indicated.

2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwatervalve.


3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.4. Backwater valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers andSupports." Install the following:


a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.


B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimumrods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacingand minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2” and NPS 2”: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3”: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4” and NPS 5”: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches.

F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4”: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2” and NPS 2”: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 2-1/2”: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.4. NPS 3” to NPS 5”: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 andmanufacturer’s written instructions.


3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transitionfitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smallerthan required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "PlumbingFixtures."

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizesindicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, butnot smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours beforeinspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing orclosing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction toobserve tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test orinspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities havingjurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities havingjurisdiction.

1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,until satisfactory results are obtained.

2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt anddebris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION

DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES15155-1

SECTION 15155

DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties:

1. Backwater valves.2. Cleanouts.3. Floor drains.4. Roof flashing assemblies.5. Miscellaneous drainage piping specialties.6. Flashing materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities andoperating characteristics.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specifiedtesting agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1.3. Size: Same as connected piping.4. Body: Cast iron.5. Cover: Cast iron with bolted access check valve.


6. End Connections: Hub and spigot.7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field

modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition.8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to

field-installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.

B. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet.3. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor

drain.4. Check Valve: Removable ball float.5. Inlet: Threaded.6. Outlet: Spigot.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts (CO):


a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg,. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch Hubless, cast-iron

soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.5. Closure: Countersunk brass plug.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts (FCC):1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.


c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Watts Drainage Products Inc.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.3. Size: Same as connected branch.4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.5. Body: Cast iron.6. Clamping Device: Required.7. Outlet Connection: Inside calk or Spigot.8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron or Plastic to match piping material with

threads.10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy or Polished

bronze.11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.12. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to

cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts (WCO):


a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe

test tee as required to match connected piping.5. Closure: Countersunk drilled-and-threaded brass plug.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.7. Wall Access: Round, flat, stainless steel cover plate with stainless steel screws.8. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, wall-installation frame and cover.9. Wall Access: Stainless round covers or locking access panels.

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains (FD-1, FD-2, FD-3):



a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.c. Watts Drainage Products Inc.d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.3. Pattern: Area Floor drain.4. Body Material: Gray iron.5. Seepage Flange: Not Required.6. Anchor Flange: Not required.7. Clamping Device: Not required.8. Outlet: Bottom.9. Backwater Valve: Not required.10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.11. Sediment Bucket: Not required.12. Top or Strainer Material: Indicated on drawings.13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Indicated on drawings.14. Top Shape: Round.15. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: Indicated on drawings.16. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty and Medium Duty.17. Funnel: Not required.18. Inlet Fitting: Spigot outlet.19. Trap Material: Cast iron.20. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.21. Trap Features:22. Trap primer piping shall be pitched toward drain.

2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies (VTR):


a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, leadflashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steelboot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.


2.5 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, andtrap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2” side inlet.

B. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counter flashing type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess forterminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

C. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimumweights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similaraccessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material beinginstalled.

D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, providecleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and ofadequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to thefollowing, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4”. Use NPS 4” for larger drainagepiping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 2” and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping.4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flushwith finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of typesindicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drainsflush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage arearadii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater

than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drainand adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes wherepenetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unlessotherwise indicated.

G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extendthrough roof.

H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

I. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-sealprimer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.


J. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste pipingdischarge into sanitary drainage system.

K. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

L. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unlesstrap is indicated.

M. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locationsand within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to concealprotruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawingsindicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainageshapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness orthicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness orthinner.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embeddedin floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inchesaround sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least8 inches around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or commerciallymade flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secureflashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.


3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt ordebris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING15160-1

SECTION 15160

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building.

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Special pipe fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimumworking pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials,"for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drainpiping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Solid Wall PVC Pipe: Underground only - ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain and storm.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, and stormpatterns.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings maybe used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 8 and smaller <Insert pipe size> shall be anyof the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 15 and smaller <Insert pipe size> shallbe any of the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "BasicMechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to buildingstorm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

C. Install wall-penetration-fitting system at each service pipe penetration throughfoundation wall. Make installation watertight.

D. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, andlong-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use propersize of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected.Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true togrades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends ofpiping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's writteninstructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

F. Install PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665.

G. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

H. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved byauthorities having jurisdiction.




B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type,unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibrationand Seismic Controls."

B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers andSupports." Install the following:


a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.


4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimumrods.

F. Install hangers for storm piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

G. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing andminimum rod diameters:


1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 andmanufacturer's written instructions.


A. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt anddebris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END OF SECTION

REFRIGERANT PIPING15183-1

SECTION 15183

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansionvalves, solenoid valves, and pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes ofhorizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipmentconnection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping andequipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size piping and design the actualpiping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tubesizes, to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connectedequipment.

C. Welding and brazing certificates

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for MechanicalRefrigeration."

C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."

D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-ContainingComponents and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically OperatedValves."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

1. Refrigerants:

a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants.b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div.d. ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.

2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

a. Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration &Air Conditioning Division.

b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.d. Henry Valve Company.e. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver) BAg-2 (silver)

F. Flexible Connectors: 500-psig minimum operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze core,high-tensile bronze-braid covering, and solder-joint end connections; dehydrated,pressure tested, minimum 7 inches long.

2.3 VALVES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 500-psig working pressure and 275 deg F workingtemperature; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern; forged-brass orbronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem


and handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, and with solder-endconnections.

B. Packed-Angle Valves: 500-psig working pressure and 275 deg F working temperature;forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating,rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, and with solder-end connections.

C. Check Valves Smaller Than NPS 1: 400-psig operating pressure and 285 deg Foperating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, polytetrafluoroethyleneseat, and stainless-steel spring; globe design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern,with solder-end connections.

D. Check Valves, NPS 1 and Larger: 400-psig operating pressure and 285 deg Foperating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-brass boltedbonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained polytetrafluoroethylene seat disc.Valve shall be straight-through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.

E. Service Valves: 500-psig pressure rating; forged-brass body with copper stubs, brasscaps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder-end connections.

F. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760; 250 deg F temperature rating and 400-psigworking pressure; forged brass, with polytetrafluoroethylene valve seat, 2-way,straight-through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; fitted withsuitable NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location, with 1/2-inch conduitadapter and 24 120-V, normally closed open holding coil.

G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Comply with ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or castbronze, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc standard coil,and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; suitable for refrigerantspecified.

H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Comply with ARI 770; direct acting, brass; with pilotoperator, stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connection; suitablefor refrigerant specified.

I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight-through or angle pattern, brass body and disc,neoprene seat, and factory sealed and ASME labeled for standard pressure setting.

J. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750; brass body with stainless-steelparts; thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size and operating characteristics asrecommended by manufacturer of evaporator, and factory set for superheatrequirements; solder-end connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having sideconnection for hot-gas bypass line, and external equalizer line.

K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Pulsating-dampening design, stainless-steel bellows andpolytetrafluoroethylene valve seat; adjustable; sized for capacity equal to last step ofcompressor unloading; with solder-end connections.


2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALITIES

A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 500-psig working pressure; forged-brass or steelbody with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen of 80 to 100 mesh inliquid lines up to 1-1/8 inches, 60 mesh in larger liquid lines, and 40 mesh in suctionlines; with screwed cleanout plug and solder-end connections.

B. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig maximum working pressure and 200 deg Foperating temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewingwindow with color-coded moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.

C. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig maximum working pressure; heavy gageprotected with corrosion-resistant-painted steel shell, flanged ring and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws; wrought-copper fittings for solder-endconnections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets and the following:

1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support,ARI 730 rated for capacity.

2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activatedalumina, ARI 730 rated for capacity.

3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal anddesiccant with integral gaskets.

D. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 350-psig maximum operating pressure and 225 deg Fmaximum operating temperature; steel shell and wrought-copper fittings for solder-endconnections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.

E. Mufflers: 500-psig operating pressure, welded-steel construction with fusible plug;sized for refrigeration capacity.

2.5 RECEIVERS

A. Receivers, 6-Inch Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed, 400-psigpressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.

B. Receivers Larger Than 6-Inch Diameter: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stampedaccording to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII; 400-psig pressurerating, with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.

2.6 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing Type L drawn-coppertubing.

B. Belowground for NPS 2 and Smaller: Type K annealed-copper tubing.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines ofcompressor, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on each side of strainers.

B. Install check valves in compressor discharge lines and in condenser liquid lines onmultiple condenser systems.

C. Install packed-angle valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and thermostaticexpansion valve for system charging.

D. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves on each side of strainers anddryers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around each dryer.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.

1. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.2. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections.

Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.

G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to evaporator.

1. If refrigerant distributors are used, install them directly on expansion-valve outlet.2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb

straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.4. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect

suction-line pressure at bulb location.

H. Install pressure-regulating and pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipepressure relief valve discharge to outside.

3.3 SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver,and on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.


B. Install strainers immediately upstream from each automatic valve, including expansionvalves, solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.

C. Install strainers in main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integralstrainers are used.

D. Install strainers in suction line of steel pipe.

E. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostaticexpansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.

F. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers; pipe discharge to outdoors.

G. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers andbefore each solenoid valve.

H. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermeticcompressors, and before each solenoid valve.

I. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and inoil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suctionline when system shuts down.

J. Install receivers, sized to accommodate pump-down charge, on systems 5 tons andlarger and on systems with long piping runs.

K. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors.


A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "BasicMechanical Materials and Methods."

C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,and fittings.

D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers orbetween pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.

F. Belowground, install copper tubing in protective conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.


G. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will beexposed to mechanical injury.

H. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward awayfrom compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

I. Install bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than NPS 2.

J. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, andexpansion valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

K. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valvestems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Donot apply heat near expansion valve bulb.

L. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangersand Supports."

M. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feetlong.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported by a trapeze.4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

N. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

O. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Braze joints according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials andMethods."


B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing toprevent scale formation.


A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor,condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.

2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lowerof the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high andlow side of system.

a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughoutduration of test.

b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerinesolution over joint.

c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher asrequired by authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactoryresults are achieved.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation.2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500

micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-

operating charge.

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING FIXTURES15410 - 1

SECTION 15410

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and relatedcomponents:

1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks.2. Flushometers.3. Toilet seats.4. Protective shielding guards.5. Fixture supports.6. Water closets.7. Urinals.8. Lavatories.9. Commercial sinks.10. Individual showers.11. Service basins.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories."2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains,

and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.3. Division 15 Section "Security Plumbing Fixtures."4. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used bypeople with disabilities.

B. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

C. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture.Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts,shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Pipingand general-duty valves are included where indicated.


D. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

E. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture andtrim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports.Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of eachcategory through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from asingle manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specifiedfor that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible andUsable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; andPublic Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for peoplewith disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "EnergyPolicy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-HealthEffects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components thatare compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified forplumbing fixtures:1. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.2. Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2.3. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.4. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.5. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.


H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified forlavatory and sink faucets:1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.2. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.3. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.5. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.6. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.7. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified formiscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.3. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.4. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.5. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified formiscellaneous components:

1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.2. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.3. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.4. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.5. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship withinspecified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures of unit shell.b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.

2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of SubstantialCompletion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucets:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:a. Delta Faucet Company.b. Kohler Co.c. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.d. Sloan Valve Company

2. Description: Single-control nonmixing valve. Coordinate faucet inlets withsupplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.c. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm for public areas and 2.5 gpm for staff areas.d. Centers: 4 inches.e. Mounting: Deck, exposed.f. Valve Handle(s): Lever for staff areas only.g. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing, with NPS 1/2 male adaptor.h. Spout: Rigid type.i. Spout Outlet: Aerator for staff areas and Spray, 0.5 gpm for public areas.j. Operation: Compression, manual for staff areas and Sensor for public

areas.k. Drain: Grid.l. Tempering Device: Not required.

2.2 SINK FAUCETS

A. Sink Faucets:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:a. Delta Faucet Company.b. Kohler Co.c. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

2. Description: Kitchen faucet without spray. Include hot- and cold-waterindicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinateoutlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: General-duty, solid brass.b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated.d. Mixing Valve: Single control.e. Centers: 4 inches.f. Mounting: Deck.g. Handle(s): Lever.h. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 1/2 male adapter.i. Spout Type: Swing, shaped tube.j. Spout Outlet: Aerator.k. Operation: Compression, manual.l. Drain: Crumb cup.


2.3 FLUSHOMETERS

A. Flushometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:a. Sloan Valve Company.b. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2. Description: Flushometer for urinal and water-closet-type fixture. Include brassbody with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, controlstop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polishedchrome-plated finish on exposed parts.

a. Internal Design: Diaphragm operation.b. Style: Exposed.c. Inlet Size: NPS ¾ for urinals and NPS 1 for water closets.d. Trip Mechanism: Hard-wired, electric-sensor actuator.e. Consumption: 0.5 gal./flush for urinals 1.6 gal./flush for water closets.f. Tailpiece Size: NPS 3/4 for urinals NPS 1-1/2 for water closets and

standard length to top of bowl.

2.4 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:


a. Bemis Manufacturing Company.b. Centoco Manufacturing Corp.c. Church Seats.d. Kohler Co.e. Olsonite Corp.

2. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.

a. Material: Molded, solid plastic.b. Configuration: Open front without cover.c. Size: Elongated.d. Hinge Type: CK, check.e. Class: Standard commercial.f. Color: White.

2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:a. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.


b. TRUEBRO, Inc.c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products

Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture drainpiping and cold-water supply and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americanswith Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following:

1. Josam Company.2. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.3. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Urinal Supports:

1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling withseal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

C. Lavatory Supports:

1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

2.7 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets:


a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Kohler Co.c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.

2. Description: Accessible, floor and Floor-mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-chinafixture designed for gravity-type tank for staff areas and sensor flushometer valveoperation in public areas.

a. Style: Close coupled tank type.

1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt capsmatching fixture.

2) Height: Standard and Accessible.


3) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush.4) Tank: Gravity type with trim. Include cover.5) Trip Mechanism: Lever-handle actuator.6) Color: White.

b. Supply: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated brass or copper with wheel-handle stop.

c. Style: Flushometer valve.

1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt capsmatching fixture.

2) Height: Standard and Accessible.3) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush.4) Color: White.

2.8 URINALS

A. Urinals:


a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Kohler Co.c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.

2. Description: Accessible, wall and Wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-chinafixture designed for flushometer valve operation.

a. Type: Siphon jet.b. Strainer or Trapway: Open trapway with integral trap.c. Design Consumption: 0.5 gal./flush.d. Color: White.e. Supply Spud Size: NPS 3/4.f. Outlet Size: NPS 2.g. Fixture Support: Urinal chair carrier.

2.9 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories:


a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.c. Kohler Co.


2. Description: Counter-mounting, vitreous-china fixture.

a. Type: Self-rimming.b. Oval Lavatory Size: 20 by 17 inches.c. Faucet Hole Punching: Three holes, 4-inch centers.d. Faucet Hole Location: Top.e. Color: White.f. Faucet: Lavatory for separate drain.g. Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome-plated copper with stops.h. Drain: Grid.

1) Location: Near back of bowl.

i. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap;NPS 1-1/2, 0.032-inch-thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wallescutcheon.

B. Lavatories:


a. American Standard Companies, Inc.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.c. Kohler Co.

2. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, vitreous-china fixture designed forpeople in wheelchairs.

a. Type: Ledge back.b. Size: 20 by 26 inches minimum; rectangular.c. Faucet Hole Punching: Three holes, 4-inch centers.d. Color: White.e. Faucet: Lavatory for separate drain.f. Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome-plated copper with stops.g. Drain: Grid with offset waste.h. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap;

NPS 1-1/2, 0.045-inch- thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wallescutcheon.

i. Fixture Support: Lavatory.

2.10 COMMERCIAL SINKS

A. Commercial Sinks:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.b. Just Manufacturing Company.


2. Description: One-compartment, counter-mounting, stainless-steel commercialsink with backsplash.a. Metal Thickness: 18 gauge.b. Compartment:

1) Drain: Crumb cup with extension.

a) Location: Centered in compartment.

c. Faucet(s): Sink.

1) Number Required: One.2) Mounting: Deck.

d. Supplies: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated copper with stops or shutoff valves.e. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inch-

thick tubular brass waste to wall and wall escutcheon(s).

2.11 INDIVIDUAL SHOWERS

A. Individual Showers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:a. Florestone Products Co., Inc.b. LASCO Bathware.c. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.d. Aqua Bath Company, Inc.

2. Description: Accessible, PMMA shower enclosure with slip-resistant bathingsurface and shower rod with curtain.

a. Size: 60 by 36 inches.b. Surround: One piece.c. Surround: One piece.d. Color: White.e. Drain Location: Center.f. Accessibility Options: Include grab bar and bench.g. Faucet: Shower.h. Drain: Grid, NPS 2.

2.12 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins:


a. Acorn Engineering Company.b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.


d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

2. Description: Flush-to-wall, floor-mounting, cast-polymer fixture with rim guard.

a. Shape: Square.b. Size: 24 by 24 inches.c. Height: 12 inches with dropped front.d. Tiling Flange: On two sides.e. Rim Guard: On front top surfaces.f. Color: White.g. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems toverify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures willbe installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according tomanufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible

fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach tosupports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping orbuilding substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.


H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected towater distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spacesbehind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached foroperation.

I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directlyconnected to sanitary drainage system.

J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mountedon wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy forpeople with disabilities to reach.

K. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wideside of compartment.

L. Install toilet seats on water closets.

M. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts iffaucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

N. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies atstop valves.

O. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

P. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

Q. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locationsand within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to concealprotruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic MechanicalMaterials and Methods."

R. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, andvent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locationswhere installed.


B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and otherspecified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures andcomponents.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioningfixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow andstream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaningmethods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstallstrainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings,inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writingby Owner.

END OF SECTION

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS15415 - 1

SECTION 15415

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following water coolers and related components:

1. Pressure water coolers.2. Fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by people withdisabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

C. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated.

D. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinkingwater.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnishedspecialties, and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals.



B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible andUsable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and


Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for fixtures for people withdisabilities.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-HealthEffects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically RefrigeratedDrinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of CertifiedDrinking Water Coolers" for type and style classifications.

E. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classificationof Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant,unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that arepackaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describingcontents.

1. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each type and sizeindicated, but no fewer than 1 of each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

A. Water Coolers:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.b. Oasis Corporation.

2. Description: Accessible, ARI 1010, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, Style W,wall-mounting water cooler for adult-mounting height.

a. Cabinet: Bi-level with two attached cabinets and with bi-level skirt kit.b. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet

deck.c. Control: Push button.d. Supply: NPS 3/8 with ball, gate, or globe valve.e. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for

cyst and lead reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized forunit peak flow rate.

f. Drain(s): Grid with NPS 1-1/4 minimum horizontal waste and trapcomplying with ASME A112.18.1.


g. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, coolingcoil, air-cooled condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant,corrosion-resistant-metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat.

1) Capacity: 8 gph of 50 deg F cooled water from 80 deg F inlet waterand 90 deg F ambient air temperature.

2) Electrical Characteristics: 120-V ac; single phase; 60 Hz.

h. Support: Type II, water cooler carrier. Refer to "Fixture Supports" Article.

2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS



1. Josam Co.2. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.3. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

C. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprightswith feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to besupported.1. Type II: Bi-level, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.2. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights

instead of steel pipe uprights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations ofpiping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of pipingand types of supports match those indicated.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed watercoolers to mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connectedto water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locationswhere they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 15Section "Valves."

D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitarydrainage system.

E. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, andvent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust water cooler temperature settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and otherspots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's writteninstructions.

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES15430-1

SECTION 15430

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:

1. Backflow preventers.2. Outlet boxes.3. Loose-Key wall hydrants.4. Miscellaneous piping specialties.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems withfollowing minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.3. Condensate Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and indicate materials, finishes, dimensions,required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiringconnections for the following:

1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.2. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer systems.3. Hose bibbs and hydrants.4. Backwater valves, cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors, and trench drains.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data for the following:

1. Backflow preventers.


A. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testingagency.



C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for pipingmaterials and installation.

D. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials,""NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the followingrequirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products bythe manufacturers specified.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ames Co., Inc.2. B & K Industries, Inc.3. Cla-Val Co.4. CMB Industries, Inc.; Febco Backflow Preventers.5. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters Div.6. Sparco, Inc.7. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.8. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.

1. NPS 2” and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.2. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.3. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.4. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.


C. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovableand manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Unitsattached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

2.3 OUTLET BOXES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Acorn Engineering Company.2. Gray, Guy Manufacturing Co., Inc.3. Oatey.4. Plastic Oddities, Inc.5. Symmons Industries, Inc.6. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div.

B. General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with supply fittings complying withASME A112.18.1M. Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipmentconnections, and wood-blocking reinforcement.

C. Icemaker Outlet Boxes: With hose connection and the following:

1. Box and Faceplate: Plastic.2. Supply Fitting: NPS 1/2” ball valve and NPS 1/2” copper, water tubing.

2.4 DRAIN VALVES

A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimumCWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brassball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.

2.5 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Josam Co.2. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.3. Watts Industries, Inc.; Drainage Products Div.4. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with removablebronze swing-check valve and threaded or bolted cover.


1. Open-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang openfor airflow.

2. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension tofield-installed cleanout at floor, instead of cover.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type withpressurized metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 orPDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Josam Co.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying withASME A112.18.1M for compression-type faucets. Include NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral nonremovable,drainable hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads complying withASME B1.20.7 on outlet.

1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze.2. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Operating key.3. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle Operating key.4. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

C. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet,and trap seal primer assembly connection.

D. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess forterminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

E. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Includevented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, and inlet side of pumps.


C. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to buildingsubstrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support isindicated.

D. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

E. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbingspecialties.

F. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball,gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessiblelocations. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check,gate, and globe valves.

G. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unlesstrap is indicated.

H. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locationsand within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to concealprotruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16Sections.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt anddebris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS15485-1

SECTION 15485

ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Light-commercial electric water heaters.2. Water heater accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include ratedcapacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


D. Warranty.



B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.b. Faulty operation of controls.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.


2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:

a. Commercial Electric Water Heaters: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 LIGHT-COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Comply with UL 174 for household, storage electric water heaters.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Lochinvar Corporation.b. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.

2. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.

a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water

tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

3. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.f. Heat Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water

outlet.g. Heating Elements: One; electric, screw-in immersion type unless

otherwise indicated.h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element.i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.


j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying withASME PTC 25.3 for combination temperature and pressure relief valves.Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and includepressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Selectrelief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

4. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Provide products indicated on drawings or comparable products of one ofthe manufacturers listed above.

2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steelbracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not lessthan base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according toASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.

D. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig-maximum outlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation onstand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.

B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design,and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storagetanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extendcommercial, water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic waterpiping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closestfloor drain.

D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into opendrains, over floor drains or to building exterior. Install hose-end drain valves at low


points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer toDivision 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.

E. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages" for thermometers.

F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tankswithout integral or fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrangepiping for easy removal of water heaters.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembledcomponents and equipment installation, including connections.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaksexist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm properoperation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioningcontrols and equipment.

C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retestas specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial electric water heaters. Refer toDivision 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

CONDENSING UNITS15671-1

SECTION 15671

CONDENSING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes air-cooled condensing units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Wiring diagrams.


D. LEED Submittals:

1. Credit EA 4: Manufacturers' product data for refrigerants, including printedstatement that refrigerants are free of HCFCs.



B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code forMechanical Refrigeration."

1. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanshipwithin specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period (Compressor Only): Five years from date of SubstantialCompletion.

2. Warranty Period (Condenser Coil Only): Five years from date of SubstantialCompletion


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS


1. Rheem Manufacturing Air Conditioning Div.2. Trane Co. (The); Worldwide Applied Systems Group.3. York International Corp.

B. Description: Factory assembled and tested, consisting of compressor, condenser coil,fan, motors, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls.

C. Compressor: Scroll, hermetically sealed, with rubber vibration isolators.

1. Motor: Single speed, and includes thermal- and current-sensitive overloaddevices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

2. Two-Speed Compressor: Include manual-reset, high-pressure switch andautomatic-reset, low-pressure switch.

3. Accumulator: Suction tube.4. Refrigerant Charge: R-22.

D. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; circuited for integral liquidsubcooler, with removable drain pan and brass service valves with service ports.

E. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated,totally enclosed fan motor with thermal-overload protection and ball bearings.

F. Accessories:

1. Coastal Filter: Mesh screen to protect condenser coil from salt damage.2. Crankcase heater.3. Cycle Protector: Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid compressor cycling.4. Electronic programmable thermostat to control condensing unit and evaporator

fan.5. Evaporator Freeze Thermostat: Temperature-actuated switch that stops unit

when evaporator reaches freezing temperature.6. Filter-dryer.7. High-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on high

refrigerant pressure.8. Liquid-line solenoid.9. Low Ambient Controller: Cycles condenser fan to permit operation down to 0

deg F.10. Low-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on low

refrigerant pressure.11. PE mounting base to provide a permanent foundation.12. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing.13. Sound Hood: Wraps around sound attenuation cover for compressor.14. Thermostatic expansion valve.


15. Time-Delay Relay: Continues operation of evaporator fan after compressorshuts off.

G. Unit Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels foraccess to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mountservice valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

H. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.

1. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed byASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

2. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed byASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

B. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintainmanufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Install condensing units on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials andinstallation requirements are specified in Division 3.

C. Install roof-mounting units on equipment supports specified in Division 7.

D. Vibration Isolation: Mount condensing units on restrained spring isolators with aminimum deflection. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements arespecified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

E. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing soit does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.

G. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access tounit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping and specialtiesare specified in Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping."




1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection.2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for

leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaksexist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units toconfirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.


5. Verify proper airflow over coils.

B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibrationtransmission to structure.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning condensing units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

MODULAR INDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS15725 - 1

SECTION 15725

MODULAR INDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes constant-volume, modular air-handling units with coils for indoorinstallations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of modular indoor air-handling unit indicated. Include thefollowing:

1. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.2. Certified fan-sound power ratings.3. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.4. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor and fan accessories.5. Material gages and finishes.6. Filters with performance characteristics.7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.



B. NFPA Compliance: Modular indoor air-handling units and components shall bedesigned, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of AirConditioning and Ventilating Systems."

C. ARI Certification: Modular indoor air-handling units and their components shall befactory tested according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall belisted and labeled by ARI.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. York International Corporation2. Trane Company3. Dunham Bush

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Modular indoor air-handling units shall be factory assembled and consist of fans, motorand drive assembly, coils, damper, plenums, filters, condensate pans, mixing dampers,control devices, and accessories.

2.3 CABINET

A. Materials: Formed and reinforced single -wall panels, fabricated to allow removal foraccess to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.

1. Outside Casing: Steel, 0.0598 inch thick.2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.0276 inch thick.3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, 0.1382 inch thick.

B. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to preventerosion of glass fibers.

2. Thickness: 1 inch.3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.4. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-

developed index of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging linerwhen applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage incabinet.

7. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanicalfasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from and includingthe cooling coil section.


C. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet, complete withhinges, latches, handles, and gaskets. Inspection and access panels and doors shallbe sized and located to allow periodic maintenance and inspections. Provide accesspanels and doors in the following locations:

1. Fan Section: Inspection and access panels.2. Access Section: Doors.3. Coil Section: Inspection panel.4. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels.5. Filter Section: Inspection and access panels to allow periodic removal and

installation of filters.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized-steel sheet complying withrequirements in ASHRAE 62. Fabricate pans with slopes in two planes to collectcondensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return bends) andhumidifiers when units are operating at maximum catalogued face velocity acrosscooling coil.

1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation andseal moisture tight.

2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough to

collect condensate from top coil.

2.4 FAN SECTION

A. Fan-Section Construction: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel,fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and supportstructure and equipped with formed-steel channel base for integral mounting of fan,motor, and casing panels. Mount fan with vibration isolation.

B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scrollhousings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allowentry to internal parts and components.

1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting andsupporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

2. Performance Class: AMCA 99-2408, Class I.3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.4. Plug Fans: With steel cabinet. Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing.

C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuousoperation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

D. Backward-Inclined Fan Wheels: Steel construction with curved inlet flange, backplate,and backward-inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and backplate.


E. Forward-Curved Fan Wheels: Black-enamel or galvanized-steel construction with inletflange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction ofairflow and mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged tobackplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

F. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation atmaximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and beltadjustment made after installation.

1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protectivecoating of lubricating oil.

2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top offan's speed range.

G. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or rollerbearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.

1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 50,000 120,000 hours.2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 50,000 120,000 hours.

H. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made afterinstallation and with 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balancedat factory.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitchfor use with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at themiddle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt drives.4. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements; 0.1046-inch- thick, 3/4-

inch diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent; primecoated.

5. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

I. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators having a minimum of2-inch static deflection and side snubbers.

J. Fan-Section Source Quality Control:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for CalculatingFan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according toAMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shallbear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotationspeed, and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "LaboratoryMethods of Testing Fans for Rating."


2.5 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

2.6 COILS

A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized-steel casings for heatingand cooling coils. Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil formaintenance and to ensure full airflow through coils.

B. Water Coils: Continuous circuit, Self-draining coil fabricated according to ARI 410.

1. Piping Connections: Threaded, on same end.2. Tubes: Copper.3. Fins: Aluminum4. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.5. Headers: Cast iron with drain and air vent tappings.6. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, 0.052 inch7. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410.

a. Working-Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.

8. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig and to 200 psig underwater.

2.7 DAMPERS

A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for TestingDampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm facevelocity through damper and 4-inch wg pressure differential.

B. Damper Operators: Electric specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentationand Controls."

C. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to steeloperating rod in reinforced, galvanized-steel cabinet. Connect operating rods withcommon linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

2.8 FILTER SECTION

A. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Filter Section: Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, withaccess doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side.

C. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type,disposable air filters with holding frames.

1. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.


2. Frame: Galvanized steel with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inletside, hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.

3. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners,suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.

D. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surfacefilters with holding frames.

1. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid.

2. Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard.3. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners,

suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Concrete Bases: Install floor mounting units on 4-inch- high concrete bases. SeeDivision 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for concrete basematerials and fabrication requirements.

B. Install modular indoor air-handling units with the following vibration -control devices.Vibration -control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical VibrationControl."

1. Units with Internally Isolated Fans: Secure units to anchor bolts installed inconcrete bases.

C. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around modular indoor air-handling units for service and maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to modular indoor air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators withflexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, Type M copper tubing. Extend tonearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan andinstall cleanouts at changes in direction.


E. Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancingvalve and union or flange at each connection.

F. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.Make final duct connections with flexible connections.

G. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for powerwiring, switches, and motor controls.

H. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

END OF SECTION

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS15738-1

SECTION 15738

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting ofseparate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designedfor exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms ofcapacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motorrequirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by Florida Energy Codeand ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-RiseResidential Buildings."

C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by Florida EnergyCode and ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-RiseResidential Buildings."

D. Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials andworkmanship within five years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Rheem2. Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group.3. York International Corp.4. Sanyo

2.2 EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT

A. Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels forservicing, and insulation on back of panel.

1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complyingwith ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directlyconnected to motor.

D. Fan Motor: Multispeed.

E. Filters: 1 inch thick, in fiberboard frames.

2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT

A. Casing steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access tocontrols, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brassservice valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed scroll type with crankcase heater and mounted onvibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitiveoverload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

1. Refrigerant Charge: R-22.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complyingwith ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.


D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.

E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.

H. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devicessecurely fastened to building structure.

B. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick,reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete,reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-PlaceConcrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mountingbase.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Installtubing to allow access to unit.

B. Connect supply and return water coil with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on thesupply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the returnconnection.

C. Connect supply and return condenser connections with shutoff-duty valve and union orflange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange onthe return connection.

D. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retestuntil no leaks exist.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirmproper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace withnew components, and retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controlsand equipment.

END OF SECTION

AIR COILS15761-1

SECTION 15761

AIR COILS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electric air coils that are not an integral part of air-handling units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishesfor each air coil. Include rated capacity and pressure drop for each air coil.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC COILS



C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acomparable product by one of the following:

1. Brasch Manufacturing Co., Inc.2. Chromalox, Inc., Wiegand Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.3. Dunham-Bush, Inc.

AIR COILS15761-2

4. INDEECO.5. Trane.6. Markel.

D. Coil Assembly: Comply with UL 1995.

E. Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percentchromium; surrounded by compacted magnesium-oxide powder in tubular-steelsheath; with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins continuously brazed to sheath.

F. Heating Elements: Open-coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percentchromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casingopenings, and fastened to supporting brackets.

G. High-Temperature Coil Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout,safety device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from duct orcasing.

1. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually reset or manually replaceable,thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.

H. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.052 inch thick for slip-in orflanged mounting.

I. Control Panel: Unit Remote mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrentprotection. Include the following controls:

1. Magnetic contactor.2. Mercury contactor.3. Toggle switches; one per step.4. Step controller.5. Time-delay relay.6. Pilot lights; one per step.7. Airflow proving switch.

J. Refer to Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for thermostat.

K. Thermostats: Wall-mounted thermostats, with temperature range from 50 to 90 deg F,and 2.5 deg F throttling range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install coils level and plumb.

B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVACDuct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."

AIR COILS15761-3

C. Straighten bent fins on air coils.

D. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers,and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."



1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electriccoils to confirm proper unit operation.


END OF SECTION

METAL DUCTS15815-1

SECTION 15815

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distributionsystems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include thefollowing:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Single-wall, round and formed fittings.


1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-movingand -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout orconfiguration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect.Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposedlayout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to 1/8 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication andinstallation details for metal ducts.

1. Provide shop drawing floor plans of all supply, return, exhaust and outside airduct.

METAL DUCTS15815-2

2. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,components, and attachments to other work.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.4. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Fittings.7. Reinforcement and spacing.8. Seam and joint construction.9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.11. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment,

vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the followingitems are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of theitems involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts including fire and plumbing pipes

and equipment, major conduit runs and pull stations3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access

to dampers and other operating devices.4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.




A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "StructuralWelding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal WeldingCode," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

METAL DUCTS15815-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" foracceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unlessotherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, rollermarks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M andhaving G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfacesexposed to view.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed ongalvanized sheet metal ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials ofadhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabricstrips and mastics.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compoundand modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard,durable, airtight seal.

D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV lightwhen cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

METAL DUCTS15815-4

F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealantcomplying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steelfasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregateconcretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rodsor galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer afterinstallation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steelrod diameters.

3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfacespainted with zinc-chromate primer.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are

electrolytically separated from ducts.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other constructionaccording to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" andcomplying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rodapplications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement andrigidity class required for pressure class.

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according toSMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

METAL DUCTS15815-5

B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed usingmanufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, andjoint reinforcement.


a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.b. Nexus Inc.c. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.


a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.b. Lockformer.

2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches andlarger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel areaunless ducts are lined.

2.6 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with acircumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

B. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts ofgalvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metaland Flexible."

C. Flat-Oval, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts accordingto SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Fabricateducts larger than 72 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.


a. McGill AirFlow Corporation.b. SEMCO Incorporated.

D. Duct Joints:

1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealedbefore and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.

METAL DUCTS15815-6

2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged jointconsisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band withgasket.

3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints perSMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.

4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped,EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection systemmanufacturer's tolerances.

a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.2) Lindab Inc.

5. Flat-Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges andone synthetic rubber gasket.

a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.2) McGill AirFlow Corporation.3) SEMCO Incorporated.

E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknessesspecified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with noexcess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.

G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radiusof die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unlesselbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complyingwith SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,"unless otherwise indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thicknessfor pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thicknessfor pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.

METAL DUCTS15815-7

c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.

4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness aslongitudinal-seam flat-oval duct.

5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or formaterial-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where spacerestrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thicknessturning vanes.

6. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degreesonly. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameterelbows with gored construction.

7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleatedelbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require miteredelbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandarddiameter elbows with gored construction.

8. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows:Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.

9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures0.040 inch thick with 2-piece welded construction.

10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specifiedabove.

11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval ductspecified above.

12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through10-Inch wg: 0.022 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS

A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to thefollowing:

1. Supply Ducts: 1-inch wg.2. Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 2-inch wg.3. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.4. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:

1. All ductwork in mechanical equipment rooms shall be single wall rectangular,round or flat oval (see plans) with external insulation as specified in Section15080. Sizes shown on plans are net inside clear dimensions.

2. All ductwork concealed above ceilings shall be single wall rectangular or roundwith external insulation as specified in Section 15080.

METAL DUCTS15815-8

3. All transfer ductwork shall be single wall rectangular (external insulation is notrequired)

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install round in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, witha minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel andperpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural andpermanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solidpartitions unless specifically indicated.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lightinglayouts, and similar finished work.

K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, andafterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaultsand electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions andexterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openingsand ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts.Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions andexterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant.Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

METAL DUCTS15815-9

O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."

P. Paint interiors of metal ducts, for registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latexfinish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and applicationrequirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of eachbranch intersection.

B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourthof failure (proof-test) load.

D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completelycured.

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregateconcretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" forbranch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC AirDuct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:

METAL DUCTS15815-10

1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodateleakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of systemor section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire systemat maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems abovemaximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice fortesting.

3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressureclasses lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negativepressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.

4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximumallowable.

3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS

A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, andperform cleaning before air balancing.

B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed fromHVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and otherpoints of entry into building.

D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling

supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers,and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coilsection, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiersand dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors anddrains.

4. Coils and related components.5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extractcontaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

METAL DUCTS15815-11

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas beingcleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaceswithout damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct accessories.

4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain panoperational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaningmaterials; comb and straighten fins.

F. Cleanliness Verification:

1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.

END OF SECTION

DUCT ACCESSORIES15820-1

SECTION 15820

DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers.2. Volume dampers.3. Fire dampers.4. Ceiling fire dampers.5. Turning vanes.6. Duct-mounting access doors.7. Flexible connectors.8. Flexible ducts.9. Duct accessory hardware.10. Security Bars

B. See Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.

C. See Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric damperactuators.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Backdraft dampers.2. Volume dampers.3. Fire dampers.4. Ceiling fire dampers.5. Smoke dampers.6. Combination fire and smoke dampers.7. Turning vanes.8. Duct-mounting access doors.9. Flexible connectors.10. Flexible ducts.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size ofeach field connection.

1. Special fittings.2. Manual-volume damper installations.


3. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damperinstallations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," andNFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" foracceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unlessotherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653Mand having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish forsurfaces exposed to view.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealedducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed ongalvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steelducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.


2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating.3. CESCO Products.4. Duro Dyne Corp.5. Greenheck.6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.7. Prefco Products, Inc.8. Ruskin Company.9. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted bladesof maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting forvarying differential static pressure.

C. Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mountingflange.

D. Blades: 0.050-inch- thick aluminum sheet.

E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating.3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.5. METALAIRE, Inc.6. Nailor Industries Inc.7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.8. Ruskin Company.9. Vent Products Company, Inc.


B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories.Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampersin a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components toseal duct consistent with pressure class.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-bladedesign as indicated, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or verticalapplications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicatedfor attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing inducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearingassembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damperassemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of eachdamper in multiple-damper assembly.

E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suitdamper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc.2. CESCO Products.3. Greenheck.4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.5. METALAIRE, Inc.6. Nailor Industries Inc.7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.8. Prefco Products, Inc.9. Ruskin Company.10. Vent Products Company, Inc.11. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.

C. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.


D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick as indicated and of length to suitapplication.

2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment ofperimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damperframe complies with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place ofinterlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel bladeconnectors.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

2.6 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS


1. Air Balance, Inc.2. CESCO Products.3. Greenheck.4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.5. METALAIRE, Inc.6. Nailor Industries Inc.7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.8. Prefco Products, Inc.9. Ruskin Company.10. Vent Products Company, Inc.11. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555C; comply with construction detailsfor tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire ResistanceDirectory."

C. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.

D. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.

E. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.


2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal andFlexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, double-vane, curved bladesof galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to bladesset 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.


a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.b. Duro Dyne Corp.c. METALAIRE, Inc.d. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforatedfaces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheetmetal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Includevision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.


a. American Warming and Ventilating.b. CESCO Products.c. Ductmate Industries, Inc.d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.e. Greenheck.f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.g. Nailor Industries Inc.h. Ventfabrics, Inc.i. Ward Industries, Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:

a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with

outside and inside handles.d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.


C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metalwith insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.


a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.

D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Corp.3. Ventfabrics, Inc.4. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, andadhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz/sq. yd.2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminatesupported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.

C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helicallywound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.


1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.4. Foil outer jacket.

D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tightenband with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size. Providenylon tie wraps at connection to diffusers.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, includingscrew cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testinginstruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant togasoline and grease.

2.12 Security Bars

A. Provide security barrier with frame equal to Titus SG-BG-FR in all security wall androot penetrations. 2 1/2 x ¼ inch horizontal bars shall be spaced on 6” centers.Securely fasten bars to security walls and roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC DuctConstruction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steelaccessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories instainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside andwhere indicated.

D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems wherebranches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum oftwo duct widths from branch takeoff.

E. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.


F. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

G. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessoriesand terminal units as follows:

1. Downstream from turning vanes and equipment.2. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers installed in walls, providing access to reset or

reinstall fusible links.3. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

H. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

J. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated withfans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

L. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

N. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.


C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

END OF SECTION

POWER VENTILATORS15838-1

SECTION 15838

POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.2. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for eachtype of product indicated and include the following:



D. Operation and maintenance data.



B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMAstandards.

C. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS




C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide theproduct indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Greenheck.2. Loren Cook Company.3. Penn Ventilation

D. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fanshaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, andaccessories.

E. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service andmaintenance.

F. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

G. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the followingfeatures:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball

bearings.3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

H. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mountedoutside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb

base; factory set to close when fan stops.4. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric

actuator; wired to close when fan stops.

I. Roof Curbs: Curb shall be manufactured by Roof Curb Systems (RCS) or approvedequal by the architect. Provide an RCS Trac Rail Roof Curb System for trapezoidalstanding seam roof panels. Provide all accessories required for a complete faninstallation. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.1. Overall Height: 12 inches minimum.2. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.


2.2 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS




1. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc.2. Greenheck.3. Loren Cook Company.4. Penn Ventilation.

D. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealedin-line applications.

E. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

F. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor,and fan wheel shall be removable for service.

G. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fanhousing.

H. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing andreceptacle for motor plug-in.

I. Accessories:

1. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilotlight.

2. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and coverplate.

3. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer.4. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-

steel springs, and fusible link.5. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille.6. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.7. Manufacturer's standard roof jack, and transition fittings.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using elastomeric mounts having a static deflection of 1 inch Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls."

C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer toDivision 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomerichangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified inDivision 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Controls."

F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

G. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "MechanicalIdentification."

H. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specifiedin Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

I. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

J. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

K. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."



1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that

connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that properthermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnectswitches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify

fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drivesystem, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.


6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan

to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controlsand equipment.

END OF SECTION

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES15855-1

SECTION 15855

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; andperformance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noiseratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, roomlocation, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the productsspecified.



2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. Grilles and registers shall be equivalent to models scheduled on the drawings:

1. Manufacturers:


a. Krueger.b. METALAIRE, Inc., Metal Industries Inc.c. Price Industries.d. Titus.

2. Materials, finish, blade arrangements, frames, damper types and accessoriesshall be equivalent to the models scheduled on the drawings.

2.3 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS

A. Diffusers shall be equivalent to models scheduled on the drawings.

1. Manufacturers:a. METALAIRE, Inc., Metal Industries Inc.b. Price Industries.c. Titus.

2. Materials, finish, face style, pattern, dampers and accessories shall be equivalentto the models scheduled on the drawings.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according toASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achievedesign requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressuredrop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installedin lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural featuresor other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of finallocation.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allowservice and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.


3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or asdirected, before starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS15900-1

SECTION 15900

HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, includingcontrol components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. Refer to "Sequence of Operation" on the drawings for requirements that relate to thisSection.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each control device indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Schematic flow diagrams.2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams.3. Details of control panel faces.4. Damper schedule.5. Valve schedule.6. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic

control diagrams.7. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points

list.

C. Software and firmware operational documentation.


E. Operation and maintenance data.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Computrol (located in Orlando, FL)2. Trane3. MC24. Johnson Controls5. Facility Integration Solutions6. Andover7. Alerton8. Automated Logic9. Siemens

New controls will be provided for all equipment. All controls shall have a BACNET in-terface. New controllers shall be tied into a new Energy Management/Building Automa-tion System that is compatible with the existing facility’s system. Controls will incorpo-rate night setback and heating/cooling changeover and shall be fully addressable withall mechanical equipment.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements,interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, wiring between all components andsoftware connected to distributed controllers operating in multi-user, multitaskingenvironment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanicalsystems. The building will have a stand-alone control system, it will not be tied intoother Owner facilities. The control system shall be compatible with the Owner’s existingportable interface devices / diagnostic terminal units. New system shall be providedwith operator works station, laptop computer, and control units as specified.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for miscellaneous 120 volt power wiring as requiredfrom point of origin as provided by Electrical Contractor to all control components asrequired for a complete operating system. Provide all transformers, relays and controlunits as required. Install 120 volt power wiring form electrical panels to control itemsper division 16 specifications.


2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: PC-based microcomputer with minimum configuration asfollows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100(Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium DuoCore 3.0 GHz or better3. Random-Access Memory: 2 GB.4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 256 min. MB video

memory, with TV out.5. Monitor: 19 inches LCD color.6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB.8. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB9. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x4810. Mouse: Three button, optical.11. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.12. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet

access.13. Printer: Color, ink-jet type as follows:

a. Print Head: 4800 x 1200 dpi optimized color resolution.b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets.c. Print Speed: Minimum of 17 ppm in black and 12 ppm in color.d. Application Software.

B. Laptop computer: PC-based microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100(Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium DuoCore 3.0 GHz or better3. Random-Access Memory: 2 GB.4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 256 min. MB video

memory, with TV out.

C. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interfaceequipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commandsfrom other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from orupload to Owner’s existing diagnostic terminal units.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.Functions include the following:

a. Global communications.b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.


e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardwareand controlled environment.

D. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronicallyprogrammable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download fromor upload to Owner’s existing diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.Functions include the following:

a. Global communications.b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to Owner’sexisting diagnostic terminal units.

E. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers.Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20

mA), or resistance signals.4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for

normally open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto)override switches and status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) orcurrent (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, andmanually adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

F. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrentprotection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supplyshall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type withthe following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for

50 percent load changes.3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150

percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

G. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression forworkstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.


2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support itsoperating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/Ocapacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power,communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or cardconnected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers toshare real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms.Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics;monitor system and report failures.

3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

2.5 ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loadsand operated by electric motor.

B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type,proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale rangeminus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.

C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure withprovision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers,including proportional band and authority.

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessiblecontrol readjustment potentiometer.

D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportionalcontrol of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off actionbelow minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor isstarted, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit toeliminate radio interference.

2.6 TIME CLOCKS


1. ATC-Diversified Electronics.2. Grasslin Controls Corporation.


3. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.4. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc.5. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA.6. TCS/Basys Controls.7. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.8. Time Mark Corporation.

B. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-daydial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failurecarryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals perday with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts.

C. Solid-state, programmable time control with 8 separate programs each with up to 100on-off operations; 1-second resolution; lithium battery backup; keyboard interface andmanual override; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendarwith 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; systemfault alarm; and communications package allowing networking of time controls andprogramming from PC.

2.7 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting asrequired.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:


a. BEC Controls Corporation.b. Ebtron, Inc.c. Heat-Timer Corporation.d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.e. MAMAC Systems, Inc.f. RDF Corporation.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected

by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches long, flexible; use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum

insertion length of 2-1/2 inches.7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.c. Thermometer: Exposed.d. Color: White


e. Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and

security screws.

C. RTDs and Transmitters:


a. BEC Controls Corporation.b. MAMAC Systems, Inc.c. RDF Corporation.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length asrequired.

6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches.

7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.c. Thermometer: Exposedd. Color: White.e. Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and

security screws.

D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.


a. BEC Controls Corporation.b. General Eastern Instruments.c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.e. TCS/Basys Controls.f. Vaisala.

2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.

3. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard andmounting plate.


4. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100percent relative humidity.

2.8 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and withadjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg.

2.9 THERMOSTATS


1. Erie Controls.2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.3. Heat-Timer Corporation.4. Sauter Controls Corporation.5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.

B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31

days.5. Short-cycle protection.6. Programming based on every day of week.7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock,

keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto.8. Battery replacement without program loss.9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day.b. Actual room temperature.c. Programmed temperature.d. Programmed time.e. Duration of timed override.f. Day of week.g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."

C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-pointadjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.


D. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator;listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-pointrange, and 2 deg F maximum differential.

1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to breakungrounded conductors.

2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.

E. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate forchanges in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwiseindicated.

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from

front of instrument.5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings

required by application.6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper

assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbingcalibration of instrument.

F. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.3. Thermometer: Exposed.4. Color: White.5. Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal.

G. Room thermostat accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on

separate base.3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.4. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- diameter, adjustment knob.

2.10 HUMIDISTATS


1. MAMAC Systems, Inc.2. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.


B. Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2percent throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-polecontacts.

2.11 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smoothmodulating action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-springmechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment oflimit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for runningtorque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running andbreakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-strokecycles at rated torque.


a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000

to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500

to 3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external,

manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators.6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 120 230-V ac.7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V

dc.8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position

feedback signal.9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.10. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.


2.12 DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).4. United Enertech Corp.5. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick,galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holesfor duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanizedsteel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-platedhardware, with oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkagehardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or

replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals,rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differentialpressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when testedaccording to AMCA 500D.

2.13 CONTROL CABLE

A. The Division 15 controls contractor shall provide all control cable as required betweencontrol components. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring shall complywith Division 16 specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors withDrawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above thefloor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances.2. Public areas.


3. Where indicated.

C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed tooutdoor temperatures.

E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15Section "Mechanical Identification."

F. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according toDivision 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping."

G. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying airducts.

H. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Voice andData Communication Cabling."

3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways andBoxes."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors andCables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Voice andData Communication Cabling."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit andpiping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway.3. Install concealed cable in raceway.4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables

where several cables follow a common path.5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect

against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of

control system, except local individual room control cables.7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for

vibration of piping and equipment.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls whenswitch is in hand position.



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units toconfirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units andretest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator.4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating

control set points are as required.5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with

sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leakchecks.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, and other applicable considerations.4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators.6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.8. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that

proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.9. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, ifapplicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designationand approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testingprocedures.


3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Referto Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING15950-1

SECTION 15950

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. General: Performance verification shall be performed by an independent certified T&BAgency that is directly contracted with the County through Moss, independent ofMechanical Contractor.

B. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Primary-secondary systems.

3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such asto reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors,and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow,smoke, odors, and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factorsof high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heatis withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.


E. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yieldrepeatable results.

F. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

G. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point ofmeasurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

H. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on thesuction side.

I. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditionsthat cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

J. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performanceratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented whenthe fan was performance tested.

K. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

L. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters orleaves the distribution system.

M. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

N. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performingand reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet thequalifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice toProceed, submit 4 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified inPart 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,submit 4 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3"Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on thisProject.

D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in thisSection, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

E. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

F. Warranties specified in this Section.



A. TAB Firm Qualifications: TAB firm as obtained by County shall be certified by eitherAABC or NEBB.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval ofTAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorizedservice representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel.Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.b. The Contract Documents examination report.c. TAB plan.d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includesthe following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certifiedTAB reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the proceduresspecified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testingand Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in [ABC's "NationalStandards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air ConditioningSystems."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or morefrequently if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibrationand the name of party performing instrument calibration.

G. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2 -"Air Balancing."

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entireTAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts withOwner's operations.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems andequipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systemsand equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled testdates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systemshave been satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on appropriate formsstating that either AABC or NEBB, whichever applies, will assist in completingrequirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the ContractDocuments. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to theContract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design andinstallation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and todiscover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems andequipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditionsof Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations ofthese balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancingand for efficient system and equipment operation.


B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project RecordDocuments."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of designassumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements ofphilosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relateperformance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects thatcan create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all orpart of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings ofHVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented whenthe equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects forair systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems,"Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and thattesting, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections havebeen performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancingdevices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, andthat their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and forefficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting andbalancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearingsare greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls isready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they areaccessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks andcontrols.

O. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:


1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intendedcontroller.

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of

fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves are properly connected.5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,

drafts, and cold walls.6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract

Documents.8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.9. Interlocked systems are operating.10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default setpoints if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify thefollowing:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required

and access to balancing devices is provided.8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations

can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedurescontained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes tothe minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. Aftertesting and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials


identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulationSpecifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanentidentification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors andrecommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outletvolumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflowmeasurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return andrelief air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than theindicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximumset-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicatedairflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributedevenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems havebeen adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:


1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum and return dampers at a position thatsimulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and staticpressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so theentering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum ofterminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plusthe static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver

the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's writteninstructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance theair outlets downstream from terminal units.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliverthe designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction inairflow.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition butleave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum returnairflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-airducts and inlets.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequatestatic pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record the final fan performance data.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting atpump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pumpflow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, inaddition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.2. Check expansion tank liquid level.3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest

vent.4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at

indicated flow.5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do

not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unlessseveral terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing

device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.


8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manuallyoperated.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Readpressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct fordifferences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve atzero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential acrossthe pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pumpdischarge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepowerfor the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Comparecalculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Reportconditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flowthat is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage

over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage overindicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage,rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-airtemperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions ofbalancing.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS


A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the followingdata:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.4. Efficiency rating.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speedsvarying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to proveproper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model andserial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adverselyaffect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actualmeasurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valveoperators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and devicepositions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed ofresponse to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.


J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the systemoperates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.12 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documentsas specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design forsystems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems'balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing.Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction toallow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completedprocedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list ofdeficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare aseparate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiplefloors.

3.13 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bondpaper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balancedsystems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testingand balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.2. Fan curves.3. Manufacturers' test data.4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.


5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include ShopDrawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data inthe final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.2. Name and address of TAB firm.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.6. Engineer's name and address.7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the

report. Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from

indicated values.15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch

diameter.e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.2. Water and steam flow rates.3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.5. Terminal units.6. Balancing stations.7. Position of balancing devices.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:


1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Unit arrangement and class.g. Discharge arrangement.h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in

inches.j. Number of belts, make, and size.k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in

inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.f. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.g. Outside airflow in cfm.h. Return airflow in cfm.i. Outside-air damper position.j. Return-air damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Coil type.d. Number of rows.e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.f. Make and model number.g. Face area in sq. ft..h. Tube size in NPS.


i. Tube and fin materials.j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Average face velocity in fpm.c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.h. Water flow rate in gpm.i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Arrangement and class.g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in

inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in

inches.g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.


I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with agrid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.e. Duct size in inches.f. Duct area in sq. ft..g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.h. Indicated velocity in fpm.i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.j. Actual average velocity in fpm.k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Test apparatus used.d. Area served.e. Air-terminal-device make.f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.h. Air-terminal-device size.i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Air velocity in fpm.c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.e. Final airflow rate in cfm.f. Final velocity in fpm.g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include thefollowing:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Room or riser served.d. Coil make and size.


e. Flowmeter type.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pumpcurves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.b. Location.c. Service.d. Make and size.e. Model and serial numbers.f. Water flow rate in gpm.g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.i. Pump rpm.j. Impeller diameter in inches.k. Motor make and frame size.l. Motor horsepower and rpm.m. Voltage at each connection.n. Amperage for each phase.o. Full-load amperage and service factor.p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.c. Actual impeller size in inches.d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.i. Final water flow rate in gpm.j. Voltage at each connection.k. Amperage for each phase.

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:


a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.

3.14 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomlycheck measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the finaltest and balance readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.

Compare the reading to the set point.d. Measure sound levels at two locations.e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies thattesting and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the finalreport, request that a final inspection be made by Owner.

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presenceof Owner.

3. Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to berechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the totalmeasurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can beaccomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurementsdocumented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, themeasurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the totalmeasurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancingshall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise thefinal report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit thefinal report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails,Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing andbalancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of theservices from the final payment.


3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verifythat balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusualconditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peaksummer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjustingduring near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS16010-1

SECTION 16010

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Basic Requirements: The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Generaland Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of thissection.

B. General Provisions: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to makeready for use complete electrical systems as specified herein and shown on the drawings.

C. Provide and Install: The word "provide" where used on the Drawings or in the Specificationsshall mean "furnish, install, mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation".The word "install" where used on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall mean "mount,connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". Perform work required by, and inaccordance with, the Contract Documents.

D. Installation: Provide and place in satisfactory condition, ready for proper operation, raceways,wires, cables, and other material needed for all complete electrical systems required by theContract Documents. Additional raceways and wiring shall be provided to complete theinstallation of the specific equipment provided. Include auxiliaries and accessories forcomplete and properly operating systems. Provide electrical systems and accessories tocomply with the NEC, state and local codes and ordinances. It is the intent of theseSpecifications that the electrical systems be suitable in every way for the use intended.Material and work which is incidental to the work of this Contract shall be provided at noadditional cost to the Contract.

E. Field Connections: Provide field connections to remote equipment and control panelsprovided under other Divisions of these Specifications. Provide raceway, wire, andinterconnections between equipment, transmitters, local indicators, and receivers. Provide120V and low voltage surge protection equipment as required. Install field connections to"packaged" equipment provided under other Divisions of these Specifications.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General: Provide labor, materials, permits, inspections and re-inspection fees, tools,equipment, transportation, insurance, temporary protection, temporary power and lighting,supervision and incidental items essential for proper installation and operation of theElectrical systems indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide materials not specificallymentioned or indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper installationand operation of the Electrical systems indicated in the contract documents.

B. Notices: Give notices, file Plans, pay fees, and obtain permits and approvals from authoritieshaving jurisdiction. Include all fees in the Bid Price.


1.03 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. General: The Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exact locations ofRaceway runs, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc. The locations of equipment,appliances, fixtures, Raceways, outlets, boxes and similar devices shown on the Drawingsare approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined and coordinated in the field. Theright is reserved to change, without additional cost, the location of any outlet within the sameroom or general area before it is permanently installed. Obtain all information relevant to theplacing of electrical work and in case of interference with other work, proceed as directed bythe Architect.

B. Discrepancies: Notify the Architect of any discrepancies found during construction of theproject. The Architect will provide written instructions as to how to proceed with that portionof work. If a conflict exists between the Contract Documents and an applicable code orstandard, the most stringent requirement shall apply.

C. Wiring: Each three-phase circuit shall be run in a separate Raceway unless otherwise shownon the Drawings. Unless otherwise accepted by the Architect, Raceway shall not be installedexposed. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings, supports, andboxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation.

D. Layout: Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installationdetails. Connections to equipment shall be made as required, and in accordance with theaccepted shop and manufacturer's setting drawings.

E. Coordination: Coordinate final equipment locations with drawings or other disciplines. Layoutbefore installation so that all trades may install equipment in available space. Providecoordination as required for installation in a neat and workmanlike manner.

1.04 EQUIPMENT SIZE AND HANDLING

A. Coordination: Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass toreach its final location. If necessary, ship the equipment in sections of specific sizes topermit the passing through the necessary areas within the structure.

B. Handling: Equipment shall be kept upright at all times. When equipment has to be tilted forease of passage through restricted areas during transportation, the manufacturer shall berequired to brace the equipment suitably, to insure that the tilting does not impair thefunctional integrity of the equipment.

1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Production: The Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawingsto maintain and submit record "As-Built Documents". Label each sheet of the RecordDocument set with “Project Record Documents” with company name of the installingcontractor in stamped or printed letters. One set shall be maintained at the site and at alltimes be accurate, clear, and complete. These drawings shall be available at all times to theArchitect's field representatives.

B. Recording: Record information concurrent with construction progress. Make entries within 24hours upon receipt of information. The "As-Built" drawings shall accurately reflect installedelectrical work specified or shown on the Contract Documents.


C. Completion: At the completion of the Work, transfer changes with a colored pencil onto thesecond set and submit to the Architect. The "As-Built" drawings shall be made available tothe Architect to make the substantial completion punch list.

D. Final: Upon Contractor’s completion of the Engineer’s final punch list, transfer all “As-Built”conditions and all requirements by the Engineer to a reproducible set of drawings and CADfiles. Submit drawings and CAD disks for review and acceptance. The Contractor shallprovide updated disks which include final As-Built conditions.

1.06 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations: The following abbreviations or initials may be used:

A/C Air ConditioningAC Alternating CurrentABV CLG Above CeilingADA Americans with Disabilities ActAF Ampere FrameAFF Above Finished FloorAFG Above Finished GradeAHU Air Handler UnitAIC Amps Interrupting CapacityAL AluminumAMP AmpereANSI American National Standards InstituteASA American Standards AssociationAT Ampere TripATS Automatic Transfer SwitchAUX AuxiliaryAWG American Wire GaugeBC Bare CopperBIL Basic Impulse LevelBMS Building Management SystemBRKR or BKR BreakerCAB CabinetC Conduit or RacewayCB Circuit BreakerCBM Certified Ballast ManufacturersCCTV Closed Circuit TelevisionCKT CircuitCLEC Clock Equipment CabinetCLG CeilingCO Conduit or Raceway OnlyCOAX Coaxial CableCOND ConductorCONN ConnectionCPU Central Processing UnitCRT Cathode Ray Terminal (Video display terminal)CT Current TransformerCU CopperCW Cold WaterDC Direct Current


DDC Direct Digital ControlDEG DegreeDISC DisconnectDO Draw OutDN DownDPST Double Pole Single ThrowEMT Electrical Metallic TubingEO Electrically OperatedEOL End of Line ResistorEWC Electric Water CoolerFAAP Fire Alarm Annunciator PanelFACP Fire Alarm Control PanelFCU Fan Coil UnitFLA Full Load AmperesFM Factory MutualGF Ground FaultGFCI Ground Fault Circuits InterrupterGND GroundHOA Hand-Off-AutomaticHORIZ HorizontalHP HorsepowerIC IntercomICU Intensive Care UnitIEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic EngineersIES Illuminating Engineering SocietyIMC Intermediate Metallic RacewayIN InchesIT Instantaneous TripIPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers AssociationJB Junction BoxKCMIL Thousand Circular MillsKV KilovoltKVA Kilo-Volt-AmpsKW KilowattsLBS PoundsLED Light Emitting DiodeLT LightLTD Long Time DelayLTT Long Time TripLTG LightingMAX MaximumMCB Main Circuit BreakerMCC Motor Control CenterMCP Motor Circuit ProtectorMIC MicrophoneMIN MinimumMLO Main Lugs OnlyMTD MountedMTG MountingMUX Multiplex (Transponder) PanelMVA Mega Volt AmpsN NeutralNC Normally Closed


NEC National Electrical CodeNECA National Electrical Contractors AssociationNEMA National Electrical Manufacturers AssociationNFPA National Fire Protection AssociationNIC Not in ContractNF Non FusedNL Non LinearNO Number or Normally Open# Number0/ PhaseOL OverloadOSHA Occupational Safety and Health AdministrationP PolePB PullboxPIV Post Indicator ValvePNL PanelPR PairPWR PowerPF Power FactorPRI PrimaryPT Potential TransformerPVC PolyvinylchlorideREF RefrigeratorRGC or GRC Rigid Galvanized RacewayRMS Root-Mean-SquareRPM Revolutions Per MinuteRECPT ReceptacleSCA Short Circuit AmpsSD Smoke DetectorSEC SecondaryS/N Solid NeutralSPKR SpeakerSPST Single Pole Single ThrowSST Solid State TripST Short Time TripSTD Short Time DelaySW SwitchSWGR SwitchgearSWBD SwitchboardTEL TelephoneTTB Telephone Terminal BoardTTC Telephone Terminal CabinetTVEC Television Equipment CabinetTYP TypicalUL Underwriters LaboratoriesUON Unless Otherwise NotedV VoltVFD Variable Frequency DriveVSD Variable Speed DriveW WireWP WeatherproofXFMR Transformer


1.07 CODES, FEES, AND STANDARDS

A. Application: The codes, standards and practices listed herein generally apply to the entireproject and specification sections. Other codes, standards or practices that are morespecific will be referenced within a particular specification.

B. Requirements: All materials and types of construction covered in the specifications will berequired to meet or exceed applicable standards of manufacturer, testing, performance, andinstallation according to the requirements of UL, ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and NEC referenceddocuments where indicated and the manufacturer's recommended practices. Requirementsindicated on the contract documents that exceed but are not contrary to governing codesshall be followed.

C. Compliance and Certification: The installation shall comply with the governing state and localcodes or ordinances. The completed electrical installation shall be inspected and certified byapplicable agencies that it is in compliance with codes.

D. Applicability: The codes and standards and practices listed herein, and their respective datesare furnished as the minimum latest requirements.

1. State of Florida.2. Marion County.3. City of Ocala.

E. Utility Company: Comply with latest utility company regulations.

F. Standards: American Society of Mechanical Engineers

1. ASME-A17.1 Elevator Code, plus Interpretations to Date.

G. Labels: Materials and equipment shall be new and free of defects, and shall be U.L. listed,bear the U.L. label or be labeled or listed with an approved, nationally recognized ElectricalTesting Agency. Where no labeling or listing service is available or desired for certain typesof equipment, test data shall be submitted to validate that equipment meets or exceedsavailable standards.

H. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards

NFPA-1 Uniform Fire Code™NFPA-13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler SystemsNFPA-20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire

ProtectionNFPA-37 Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion

Engines And Gas TurbinesNFPA-54 National Fuel Gas CodeNFPA-70 National Electrical CodeNFPA-72 National Fire Alarm CodeNFPA-75 Standard for the Protection of Information Technology EquipmentNFPA-90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating

SystemsNFPA-96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Prevention of

Commercial Cooking Operations. Subdivision 7-2.2 of NFPA 96applies prospectively only. Existing installations are permitted to


remain in place – subject to the approval of the authority havingjurisdiction

NFPA-101A Guide on Alternative Approaches to Life SafetyNFPA-101B Standard on Means of Egress for Buildings and StructuresNFPA-110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power SystemsNFPA-780 Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

1.08 INVESTIGATION OF SITE

A. General: Before commencing work, verify existing conditions at the premises including, butnot limited to, existing structural frame, existing openings; existing wall and partitionlocations, existing mechanical and electrical work, equipment type, and examine adjoiningwork on which work is in anyway dependent.

B. Responsibility: No waiver of responsibility for defective and inadequate work or additionalcost as a result of existing conditions which should have been verified shall be consideredunless notice of same has been filed by the Contractor and agreed to in writing by theArchitect before the bid date.

C. Site Renovation: Verify and coordinate existing site raceways and pipes at any excavation onsite. Provide hand-digging and required rerouting in areas of existing Raceways and pipeswithin bid price.

D. Renovation: Investigate site thoroughly and reroute raceway and wiring in area of newconstruction in order to maintain continuity of existing circuitry. Existing Raceways shown onplans show approximate locations only.

E. Special Considerations: Special attention is called to the fact that there will be piping, fixturesor other items in the existing building which must be removed or relocated in order to performthe alteration work. Include removal and relocation required for completion of the alterationsand the new construction. All existing wiring that is to remain in renovated areas shall bemade code compliant.

F. Power Outage: Special attention is called to the fact that work involved is in connection withexisting buildings which shall remain in operation while work is being performed. Work mustbe done in accordance with the priority schedule. Schedule work for a minimum outage toOwner. Request written permission and receive written acceptance from the Owner no laterthan 72 hours in advance of power and communication shut-downs. Perform work requiredat other than standard working hours where outages cannot be accepted by Owner duringregular working hours. Protect existing buildings and equipment during construction.

1.09 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK

A. Supervision: Provide one field superintendent who has had a minimum of four (4) yearsprevious successful experience on projects of comparable sizes, type and complexity. TheSuperintendent shall be present at all times when work is being performed. At least onemember of the Electrical Contracting Firm shall hold a State Master Certificate ofCompetency.

1.10 COORDINATION


A. General: Compare drawings and specifications with those of other trades and report anydiscrepancies between them to the Architect. Obtain from the Architect written instructionsto make the necessary changes in any of the affected work. Work shall be installed incooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, Trades shallmake proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect.

B. Provide all required coordination and supervision where work connects to or is affected bywork of others, and comply with all requirements affecting this Division. Work required underother divisions, specifications or drawings to be performed by this Division shall becoordinated with the Contractor and such work performed at no additional cost to Ownerincluding but not limited to electrical work required for:

1. Door hardware2. Roll-up doors3. Roll-up grilles4. Signage5. Fire shutters6. Elevators7. Sliding or automatic doors8. Mechanical Division of the Specifications9. Landscape Architect drawings

10. Lifts11. Laundry equipment12. Kitchen equipment13. Conveyors14. Interior design drawings15. Fountains16. Millwork design drawings and shop drawings

C. Obtain set of Contract Documents from Owner’s Authorized Representative or Contractor forall areas of work noted above and include all electrical work in bid whether included inDivision 16 Contract Documents or not.

D. Secure approved shop drawings from all required disciplines and verify final electricalcharacteristics before roughing power feeds to any equipment. When electrical data onapproved shop drawings differs from that shown or called for in Construction Documents,make adjustments to the wiring, disconnects, and branch circuit protection to match thatrequired for the equipment installed.

E. Damage from interference caused by inadequate coordination shall be corrected at noadditional cost to the Owner.

F. Adjustments: Locations of raceway and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate thework with interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact routing andlocation of systems prior to fabrication or installation.

G. Priorities: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. Forexample, plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whose elevationscannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed.

H. Modifications: Offsets and changes of direction in raceway systems shall be made tomaintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the


drawings. Provide elbows, boxes, etc., as required to allow offsets and changes to suit jobconditions.

I. Replacement: Work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damage to otherparts) of other system components provided under this Contract requiring periodicreplacement or maintenance. Raceway shall be arranged in a manner to clear the openingsof swinging overhead access doors as well as ceiling tiles.

J. Layout: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs andlocations of raceway and equipment, and not necessarily showing required offsets, detailsand accessories and equipment to be connected. Work shall be accurately laid out withother Trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain a neat and workmanlike installation, which willafford maximum accessibility for operation, maintenance and headroom.

K. Contract Conflicts: Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what Tradeprovides items such as starters, disconnects, flow switches, etc. such conflicts shall becoordinated between the divisions involved. It is the intent of the Contract Documents thatall work shall be provided complete as one bid price.

L. Drawing Conflicts: Where drawing details, plans or specification requirements are in conflictand where sizes of the same item run are shown to be different within the contractdocuments, the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contract. Systems andequipment called for in the specification or as shown on the drawings shall be provided as ifit was required by both the drawings and specifications. Prior to ordering or installation ofany portion of work, which appears to be in conflict, such work shall be brought to Architect'sattention for direction as to what is to be provided.

M. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate the exact required location of flooroutlets, floor ducts, floor stub-ups, etc. with Owner’s Authorized Representative and Designer(and receive their approval) prior to rough-in. Locations indicated in Contract Documents areonly approximate locations.

N. The Contract Documents describe specific sizes of switches, breakers, fuses, Raceways,conductors, motor starters and other items of wiring equipment. These sizes are based onspecific items of power consuming equipment (heaters, lights, motors for fans, compressors,pumps, etc.). Coordinate the requirements of each load with each load’s respective circuitryshown and with each load’s requirements as noted on its nameplate data and manufacturer’spublished electrical criteria. Adjust circuit breaker, fuse, Raceway, and conductor sizes tomeet the actual requirements of the equipment being provided and installed and change fromsingle point to multiple points of connection (or vice versa) to meet equipment requirements.Changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

O. Working Clearances: Minimum working clearances about electrical equipment shall be asreferenced in the applicable edition NEC Article 110, and shall include equipment installed inceiling spaces.

1.11 DEMOLITION

A. General: Relocate existing equipment and reroute existing raceways in areas beingrenovated as required to facilitate the installation of the new systems. The Owner shallrequire continuous operation of the existing systems, while demolition, relocation work ornew tie-ins are performed.


B. Coordination: Prior to any deactivation, relocation or demolition work, arrange a conferencewith the Architect and the Owner's representative in the field to inspect each of the items tobe deactivated, removed or relocated. Care shall be taken to protect equipment designatedas being relocated and reused or equipment remaining in operation and integrated with thenew systems.

C. Provisions: Deactivation, relocation, and temporary tie-ins shall be provided by theContractor. Demolition, removal and the legal disposal of demolished materials shall beprovided by the Contractor.

D. Owner’s Salvage: The Owner reserves the right to inspect the material scheduled forremoval and salvage any items he deems usable as spare parts.

E. Phasing: The Contractor shall perform work in phases as directed by the Architect to suit theproject progress schedule, as well as the completion date of the project.

1.12 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Specified Manufacturers: All panelboard and circuit breakers shall be of the manufacturerand type specified herein, and as indicated on the drawings or the Coordination Study. Anydiscrepancies or conflicts in specified equipment shall be brought to the attention of theengineer during bid, for formal clarification.

B. Substitutions: Alternate manufacturers listed will be considered under the followingconditions:

1. Written approval of the Owner to consider alternate manufacturer.2. Ability of alternate manufacturer to meet the requirements of the Construction

Documents.3. Alternate equipment selection shall provide selective overcurrent device coordination,

including coordination with existing equipment.4. Submission of coordination plots, showing proper selective coordination of proposed

equipment for reference and review. Provide coordination plots for all distributionbranches indicated on Construction Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturers are listed asacceptable each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the design selection buteach must meet all specification requirements. Where a manufacturer's model number islisted, this model shall set the standard of quality and performance required. Where nobrand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject to Engineer's review andacceptance. Where manufacturers are listed, one of the listed manufacturers shall besubmitted for acceptance. No substitutions are permitted.

B. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association orgovernment standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate thatthe product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer, Contractorshall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.


C. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturer's,materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents.

D. Space Requirements: Equipment or optional equipment shall conform to established spacerequirements within the project. Equipment which does not meet space requirements, shallbe replaced at no additional expense to the Contract. Modifications of related systems shallbe made at no additional expense to the Contract. Submit modifications to theArchitect/Engineer for acceptance.

E. Samples: Samples are to be submitted for items requested within Specification Sections todetermine that the item meets specifications and requirements before being accepted for useon Project. Samples shall be submitted within 30 days after the award of the contract. Eachsample shall be tagged, labeled, or marked, "Sample of ..... for (Project). Accompanysamples with copy, in duplicate of manufacturer's instructions regarding installation, andmaintenance.

2.02 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: Shop drawings shall be submitted for every item listed within the Submittals sectioneach individual specification section. One copy shall be submitted to the engineer prior toordering equipment. Refer to Basis of approval paragraph.

B. Responsibility: It is the Contractors responsibility to provide material in accordance with theplans and specifications. Material not provided in accordance with the plans andspecifications shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense.

C. Official Record: The shop drawing submittal shall become the official record of the materialsto be installed. If materials are installed which do not correspond to the record submittal theyshall be removed from the project without any additional cost or delays in constructioncompletion.

D. Information: The shop drawing record submittal shall include the following information to theextent applicable to the particular item;

1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.2. Standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA, IEEE, ISA, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA,

UL, or other organizations, including the type, size, or other designation.3. Dimensioned plan, sections, and elevations showing means for mounting, raceway

connections, and grounding, and showing layout of components.4. Materials and finish specifications, including paints.5. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.6. Internal wiring diagram indicating connections to components and the terminals for

external connections.7. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, operation, and

maintenance.8. Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts.9. Provide 1/2” = 1’-0” enlarged electrical room layout drawings for all electrical rooms. All

equipment shall be indicated at actual size of equipment being provided. Alldimensions and required working clearances shall be shown.

E. Coordination Study: This project has been designed and coordinated (electrical distributionsystem) utilizing the specified manufacturer(s).


F. Preparation: Prior to submittal, shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and contractrequirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be accompanied by astatement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity to Specifications andDrawings. This statement shall also list discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings.Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned to Contractor unreviewed.

G. Basis of Review: Approval is only for general conformance with the design concept of theproject and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents.Contractor is responsible for quantities, dimensions, fabrication processes, and constructiontechniques.

H. Responsibility: The responsibility that dimensions are confirmed and correlated with propercoordination of other trades shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. Theresponsibility and the necessity of providing materials and workmanship required by theSpecifications and Drawings which may not be indicated on the shop drawings shall beincluded as part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for any delays injob progress occurring directly or indirectly from late submissions or re-submissions of shopdrawings, product data, or samples.

I. Ordering Equipment: No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineerhas officially received the shop drawings record submittal and has formally released theContractor for submittal requirements.

J. Brochure Requirements: Submit Technical Information Brochures at the start of constructionor no later than 30 days after Award of the Contract. Each brochure shall consist of anadequately sized, hardcover, 3-ring binder for 8-1/2" X 11" sheets. Provide correctdesignation on outside cover and on end of brochure. When one binder is not enough toadequately catalog all data, an additional binder shall be submitted.

K. Brochure Contents: First sheet in the brochure shall be a photocopy of the Electrical Indexpages in these specifications. Second sheet shall be a list of Project Addresses for thisproject. Third sheet shall list Project Information. Provide reinforced separation sheetstabbed with the appropriate specification reference number and typed index for each sectionin the Electrical Schedule. Technical Information consisting of marked catalog sheets orshop drawings shall be inserted in the brochure in proper order on all items specified andshown on drawings. At the end of the brochure, provide and insert a copy of thespecifications for this Division and all addenda applicable to this Division.

L. Contractor's Review: Review the brochures before submitting to the Engineer. No requestfor payment shall be considered until the brochure has been reviewed, stamped andsubmitted for review.

M. Cost: Submit cost breakdown on work in the Technical Information Brochures. The cost ofmaterial and labor for each item shall be indicated. The cost of fittings and incidentals arenot required.

N. Title Drawings: Title drawings to include identification of project and names of Architect-Engineer, Engineer, Contractors, and/or supplier, data, number sequentially and indicate ingeneral;

1. Fabrication and Erection dimensions.2. Arrangements and sectional views.


3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections with otherwork.

4. Kinds of materials and finishes.5. Descriptive names of equipment.6. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the contract.7. Leave blank area, size approximately 4 by 2-1/2 inches, near title block (for Engineer's

stamp imprint).8. In order to facilitate review of shop drawings, they shall be noted, indicating by cross-

reference the contract drawings, notes, and specification paragraph numbers whereitems occur in the contract documents.

9. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements.

O. Technical Data: Submit technical data verifying that the item submitted complies with therequirements of the specifications. Technical data shall include manufacturer's name andmodel number, dimensions, weights, electrical characteristics, and clearances required.Indicate optional equipment and changes from the standard item as called for in thespecifications. Provide drawings, or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, coveringequipment, showing arrangement of components and overall coordination.

P. Same Manufacturer: In general, relays, contactors, starters, motor control centers,switchboards, panelboards, dry type transformers, disconnect switches, circuit breakers,manual motor starter switches, etc., shall be supplied and manufactured by the samemanufacturer. This requirement shall apply to same type of electrical components specifiedin other Divisions.

2.03 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Each item of equipment or material shall be manufactured by a company regularlyengaged in the manufacturer of the type and size of equipment, shall be suitable for theenvironment in which it is to be installed, shall be approved for its purpose, environment, andapplication, and shall bear the UL label.

B. Installation Requirements: Each item of equipment or material shall be installed inaccordance with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, however, themethods shall not be less stringent than specified herein.

C. Required Accessories: Provide all devices and materials, such as expansion bolts,foundation bolts, screws, channels, angles, and other attaching means, required to fastenenclosures, raceways, and other electrical equipment and materials to be mounted onstructures which are existing or new.

D. Protection: Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately protectedagainst mechanical injury or damage by the elements. Equipment shall be stored in drypermanent shelters. If apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at noadditional cost or time extension to the Contract. If apparatus has been subject to possibleinjury, it shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried out and put through tests as directed by theManufacturer and Engineer, or shall be replaced, if directed by the Engineer, at no additionalcost to the Contract.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT


A. General: Electrical items shall be identified as specified in the Contract Documents. Suchidentification shall be in addition to the manufacturer's nameplates and shall serve to identifythe item's function and the equipment or system, which it serves or controls. Refer toIdentification Section of the specifications for additional information.

2.05 CONCRETE PADS

A. General: Provide reinforced concrete pads for floor mounted electrical equipment. Unlessotherwise noted, pads shall be nominal four (4) inches high and shall exceed dimensions ofequipment being set on them, including future sections, by six (6) inches on all sides, exceptwhen equipment is flush against a wall, then the side or sides against the wall shall be flushwith the equipment. Chamfer top edges 1/2". Trowel surfaces smooth. Reinforce pads with#5 reinforcing bars at 24" centers each way, unless specifically detailed on drawings.

2.06 SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. General: Surface mounted fixtures, outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. shall have a factory-appliedfinish or shall be painted as accepted by Engineer. Raceways and fittings, where allowed tobe installed surface mounted, shall be painted to match the finish on which it was installed.Paint shall be in accordance with other applicable sections of these specifications.

2.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Core Drilling: The Contractor shall be responsible for core drilling as required for work underthis section, but in no case shall the Contractor cut into or weld onto any structural elementof the project without the written approval of the Architect.

B. Cutting and Patching: Cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be provided asspecified in the contract documents. Cutting and patching shall be performed in a neat andworkmanlike manner. Upon completion, the patched area shall match adjacent surfaces.

C. Openings and Sleeves: Locate openings required for work performed under this section.Provide sleeves, guards or other accepted methods to allow passage of items installed underthis section.

D. Roof Penetration: Provide roofer with pitch pans, fittings, etc., required for electrical itemswhich penetrate the roof. Roof penetrations are to be waterproofed in such a manner thatroofing guarantees are fully in force. Roof penetrations shall be coordinated with otherTrades to ensure that roof warranty is not invalidated.

2.08 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS

A. Sleeves: Provide sleeves for Raceways penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locatenecessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured. Watertight sleevesshall be line seal type WS. Fire rated partition sleeves shall be mild steel. Sleeves shall beSchedule 40 PVC or galvanized rigid steel unless specifically noted otherwise. Size shall beone standard diameter larger than pipe being installed or of a larger diameter to below 1/4"minimum clearance.

B. Forms: Provide boxed out forms for Raceway penetrations only where allowed by theArchitect. Fill opening after Raceway installation, with equivalent material.


2.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Owner’s Representative, to the complete satisfaction of theArchitect and Engineer, in the proper operation of all systems and equipment provided. TheContractor shall make all arrangements, via the Architect, as to whom the instructions are tobe given in the operation of the systems and the period of time in which they are to be given.The Architect shall be completely satisfied that the Owner’s Representative has beenthoroughly and completely instructed in the proper operation of all systems and equipmentbefore final payment is made. If the Architect determines that complete and thoroughinstructions have not been given by the Contractor to the Owner's Representative, then theContractor shall be directed by the Architect to provide whatever instructions are necessaryuntil the intent of this paragraph of the Specification has been complied with.

B. Submittals: Submit to the Architect for approval five (5) typed sets, bound neatly in loose-leafbinders, of instructions for the installation, operation, care and maintenance of equipmentand systems, including instructions for the ordering and stocking of spare parts for equipmentinstalled under this contract. The lists shall include part number and suggested suppliers.Each set shall also include an itemized list of component parts that should be kept on handand where such parts can be purchased.

C. Information Requirements: Information shall indicate possible problems with equipment andsuggested corrective action. The manuals shall be indexed for each type of equipment.Each section shall be clearly divided from the other sections. A sub index for each sectionshall also be provided.

D. Instructions: The instructions shall contain information deemed necessary by the Architectand include but not limited to the following:

1. Introduction:a. Explanation of Manual and its use.b. Summary description of the Electrical Systems.c. Purpose of systems.

2. System:a. Detailed description of all systems.b. Illustrations, schematics, block diagrams, catalog cuts and other exhibits.

3. Operations:a. Complete detailed, step by step, sequential description of all phases of operation

for all portions of the systems, including start up, shutdown and balancing.Include posted instruction charts.

4. Maintenance:a. Parts list and part numbers.b. Maintenance and replacement charts and the Manufacturer's recommendations

for preventive maintenance.c. Trouble shooting charts for systems and components.d. Instructions for testing each type of part.e. Recommended list of on-hand spare parts.f. Complete calibration instructions for all parts and entire systems.g. General and miscellaneous maintenance notes.


5. Manufacturer's Literature:a. Complete listing for all parts.b. Names, addresses and telephone numbers.c. Care and operation.d. All pertinent brochures, illustrations, drawings, cuts, bulletins, technical data,

certified performance charts and other literature with the model actually furnishedto be clearly and conspicuously identified.

e. Internal wiring diagrams and Engineering data sheets for all items and/orequipment furnished under each Contract.

f. Guarantee and warranty data.

2.10 SERVICE AND METERING

A. Service: Make arrangements with the Utility Company for obtaining a complete service. Paycharges and provide labor and material for the service. Service shall be obtained at208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz from the Utility Company. Provide undergroundcables and raceways for incoming services from the utility's transformer to equipment

C. Fees: Contact the Utility Company to determine if any fees, charges or costs will be due theCompany, as required for temporary power, permanent power, installations, hook-ups, etc.This fee, charge or cost shall be included in the bid price.

D. Payment: Pay for required licenses, fees and inspections. Include costs in the proposedconstruction cost submission. These costs shall include but not be limited to applicabletaxes, permits, necessary notices, certificates and costs required to obtain same.

E. Codes: Install a complete system in accordance with the latest edition of the NationalElectrical Code and the latest regulations of governing local, State, County and otherapplicable codes, including the Utility Company requirements.

F. Provide transformer pad per Utility Company requirements.

2.11 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. Capacity: Provide capacity from new temporary service. Make arrangements with the Ownerfor temporary service and pay all related expenses. Temporary light and power shall beprovided constantly during the project dependent upon Owner's safety requirements.

B. Capacity: Make arrangements with the Owner for existing temporary service and pay allrelated expenses. Temporary light and power shall be provided constantly during the projectdependent upon Owner's safety requirements.

C. Lighting: Temporary light shall be based on one 200 watt lamp covering each 1,000 squarefoot of floor area in the building. Each room 100 square foot and over shall have a minimumof one 100-watt lamp with guards. Provide power for motors up to 3/4 horsepower only.Provisions are to be made for electric welders, if required.

D. Outlets: Provide outlets located at convenient points so that extension cords of not over fifty(50) feet will reach work requiring artificial light or power.


E. Other Connections: Contractors of other trades shall furnish their own cords and sockets, asmay be required for their work and shall also pay for cost of temporary wiring of constructionoffices and shanties used by them.

F. New Fixtures: Permanently installed lighting fixtures may be used for temporary lighting at theContractor's option with the provision that cool white lamps for fluorescent, clear lamps forincandescent and marked temporary for other types shall be installed. At job completion,lamps shall be replaced with permanent lamps specified.

G. Wiring: Temporary electrical work shall be furnished and installed in conformity with theNational Electrical Code and in accordance with the requirements of the local ordinances andshall be maintained in a workmanlike manner throughout their entire construction period andshall be removed after installation of the permanent electrical systems. Extension cords shallbe GFCI protected or shall be fed from GFCI circuit breakers.

H. Payment: The Contractor will pay for the cost of energy consumed by all trades. Anytemporary wiring of a special nature for light and power required other than mentioned aboveshall be paid for by the Contractor using same.

2.12 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Support: Existing Raceway and cables within the area of renovation shall be provided withproper supports as specified for new work in other sections of this specification.

B. Installation: Existing electrical which is designated for reworking or requires relocation, repairor adjustment shall conform to applicable codes and shall be treated as new work complyingto all sections of this specification.

C. Violations: Where existing conditions are discovered which are not in compliance with thecodes and standards, the Contractor shall submit proper documentation to the Architect forclarification and corrective work direction. Existing conditions shall not remain which willcreate a disapproval of the renovated area.

D. Patching: Existing Raceway and cable penetrations shall be properly fire treated per codeand specification requirements. The Contractor shall thoroughly inspect existing locationsand include the cost of patching and repair in his proposed construction cost.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be performed in a neat,workmanlike and timely manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeable of therequirements of the Contract Documents. They shall be skilled in the methods andcraftsmanship needed to produce a quality level of workmanship. Personnel who installmaterials and equipment shall be qualified by training and experience to perform theirassigned tasks.

B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first-qualityappearance and function, conforming to applicable standards of building systemconstruction, and exhibiting a high degree of quality and proficiency which is judged by the


Architect as equivalent or better than that ordinarily produced by qualified industrytradesmen.

C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation of materialand equipment who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be careless or unqualifiedto perform the assigned tasks. Material and equipment installations not in compliance withthe Contract Documents, or installed with substandard workmanship and not acceptable tothe Architect, shall be removed and reinstalled by qualified craftsmen, at no change in thecontract price.

3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP

A. Protection and Restoration: Suitably protect equipment provided under this Division duringconstruction. Restore damaged surfaces and items to "like new" condition before a requestfor substantial completion inspection.

B. Handling: Materials shall be properly protected and Raceway openings shall be temporarilyclosed by the Contractor to prevent obstruction and damage. Post notice prohibiting the useof systems provided under this Contract, prior to completion of work and acceptance ofsystems by the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect hismaterials from damage and theft.

C. Safeguards: The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper safety guards for theprevention of accidents that might be caused by the workmanship, materials, equipment orsystems provided under this contract.

D. Cleanup: Keep the job site free from debris and rubbish. Remove debris and rubbish fromthe site and leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis.

3.03 SYSTEMS GUARANTEE

A. General: Provide a one-year guarantee. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to theOwner for any defective workmanship or material, which has been provided under thisContract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from the date of substantialcompletion of the System. The guarantee shall include lamps, for ninety days after date ofSubstantial Completion of the System. Explain the provisions of guarantee to the Owner atthe "Demonstration of Completed System".

3.04 FINAL OBSERVATION

A. General: Work shall be completed, and forms and other information shall be submitted foracceptance one week prior to the request for final observation of the installation.

3.05 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

A. Comply with special requirements imposed at site by Owner. This may include badging ofemployees, prohibition of smoking, special working hours, or special working conditions.


END OF SECTION


CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED DEMONSTRATION MEMO

Note to Contractor: Do not submit this form at the time Technical Information Brochure is submitted.Submit five copies of information listed below for checking at least one week before scheduledcompletion of the building. After information has been accepted and inserted in each brochure, givethe Owner a Demonstration of the Completed Electrical Systems and have the Owner sign fivecopies of this form. Provide one signed copy for each brochure. After this has been done, a writtenrequest for a final inspection of the System shall be made.

Re: ___________________________________________________________________________ (Name of Project) ___________________________________________________________________________ (Division Number and Name)

This memo is for the information of all concerned that the Owner has been given a Demonstration ofthe Completed Electrical Systems on the work covered under this Division. This conferenceconsisted of the system operation, a tour on which all major items of equipment were pointed out,and the following items were given to the Owner;

(a) Owner's copy of Technical Information Brochure containing approved submittal sheets on allitems, including the following; (To be inserted in the Technical Information Brochure after thecorrect tab).

(1) Maintenance Information published by manufacturer on equipment items.(2) Printed Warranties by manufacturers on equipment items.(3) Performance verification information as recorded by the Contractor.(4) Check-out Memo on equipment by manufacturer's representative.(5) Written operating instructions on any specialized items.(6) Explanation of the one-year guarantee on the system.

(b) "As-Built" conditions as described in the record drawing specifications.(c) A demonstration of the System in Operation and of the maintenance procedures which shall be

required.

__________________________________________________________________________(Name of General Contractor)

By: __________________________________________________________________________(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)

__________________________________________________________________________(Name of SubContractor)

By: __________________________________________________________________________(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)

Brochure, Instruction, Prints, Demonstration & Instruction in Operation Received:____________________________________________________________(Name of Owner)

By: ____________________________________________________________(Authorized Signature, Title, Date)

cc: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Sub Contractor and General Contractor(List names as stated in cc: above)

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL16051 - 1

SECTION 16051

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.3. Sleeve seals.4. Grout.5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights thatreduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference toother installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be

clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-placeconcrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.


C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behindfinished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified inDivision 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application offirestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanizedsteel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-ironpressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and noside more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thicknessshall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, providecomparable product by one of the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable orconduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway orcable.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.


2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallicaggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitablefor application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and tocenter of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are notindicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximumpossible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement ofcomponents of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect insuch a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with otheritems in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, orbusways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor andwall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes orformed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleevedopening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wallassemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated duringconstruction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and racewayor cable, unless indicated otherwise.


H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Toolexposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space betweensleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, andlocation of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and sealraceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply withrequirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables withflexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleevesand mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clearspace between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleevesto allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve forinstalling mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for racewayor cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemblemechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable andsleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expandand make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electricalinstallations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestoppingmaterials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

END OF SECTION

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS16052 - 1

SECTION 16052

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Communications equipment coordination and installation.2. Sleeves for pathways and cables.3. Sleeve seals.4. Grout.5. Common communications installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of communications equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights thatreduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference toother installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.4. So connecting pathways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be

clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-placeconcrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.


C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for communications items that arebehind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels arespecified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES



C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and noside more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thicknessshall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween sleeve and pathway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable orconduit. Include type and number required for material and size of pathway orcable.




2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallicaggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitablefor application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION


B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and tocenter of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are notindicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximumpossible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement ofcomponents of both communications equipment and other nearby installations.Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interferencewith other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trayspenetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wallassemblies.



D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wallassemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated duringconstruction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathwayor cable, unless indicated otherwise.


H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Toolexposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space betweensleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, andlocation of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,ceilings, and floors at pathway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and sealpathway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply withrequirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables withflexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleevesand mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clearspace between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleevesto allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve forinstalling mechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathwayor cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemblemechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable andsleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expandand make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies forcommunications installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

END OF SECTION

GROUNDING AND BONDING16060 - 1

SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. General: Provide a grounding electrode system, as described in NEC 250, asspecified herein and as indicated on plans.

B. Ground Field / Ground Rods: The ground field shall consist of three 20 ft longvertically driven ground rods arranged in a triangular pattern spaced 20 feet apart.Additional ground rods shall be added as necessary to achieve the desired resistance.

C. Main Metallic Water Pipe: The building’s main metallic underground water piping shallbe utilized as a grounding electrode, provided the metal pipe is installed in directcontact with the earth for a minimum of 10 feet. Bond the main metallic water servicewithin 5 ft. of the entrance of the water pipe into the building.

D. Building Steel: The building steel shall be utilized as a grounding electrode, providedthe steel is in direct contact with the earth or is otherwise effectively grounded.

E. Rebar: In concrete buildings, provide bond to rebar in concrete.

F. Resistance: Grounding electrode resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. Overallresistance of the entire grounding electrode system shall not exceed 5 ohms. Provideadditional grounding electrodes as required to meet this value. Refer to Section 16020for testing requirements.

1.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: A main grounding electrode conductor, bare copper,sized per NEC, shall be run in PVC conduit from main service equipment to thegrounding electrodes. This conductor shall also be bonded to the following:


1. Telecommunications service ground within 20’ of the electrical service.2. Lightning protection system.3. Gas and other interior metal piping – refer to NEC.

1.5 SEPARATELY DERIVED GROUNDING SYSTEMS

A. Description: Provide a separately derived grounding system where indicated hereinand as required by the National Electrical Code. Bond neutral and ground bussestogether.

B. Services: Provide a separately derived grounding system for all building electricalservices and step-down transformers.

C. Emergency Generator: Provide a separately derived grounding system for theemergency system where 4-pole transfer switches are used (neutral and phaseconductors switched).

D. Multiple Buildings: Multiple buildings fed from the same electrical service shall beprovided with separate grounding electrode systems, as required by the NEC andspecified herein.

1.6 BONDING AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Dscription of System: In general, all electrical equipment (metallic conduit, motorframes, panelboards, etc.) shall be bonded together with a green insulated coppersystem grounding conductor in accordance with specific rules of Article 250 of the NECEquipment grounding conductors through the raceway system shall be continuous frommain switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard, and from panelgrounding bar of each panelboard to branch circuit equipment and devices.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: All raceways shall have an insulated coppersystem ground conductor run throughout the entire length of circuit installed withinconduit in strict accordance with NEC. Grounding conductor shall be included in totalconduit fill when determining conduit sizes, even though not included or shown ondrawings.

C. Redundant Grounding: In general all branch circuits shall be provided with aredundant grounding system through the use of grounding conductors and metallicconduit.

D. Bonding: Provide bonding of the equipment grounding terminal busses of normal andessential branch circuit panelboards serving the same patient area with a continuous#10 AWG copper green insulated conductor, in compliance with NEC 517-14, ifapplicable.

E. Bonding: In addition to connections to grounding electrodes, the main service groundshall be bonded to the lightning protection system and other underground metal piping.


F. Light Poles: All exterior light poles shall have their enclosures grounded directly to aseparate driven ground at the light pole in addition to the building ground connection,via the circuit equipment ground conductor.

G. Bushings: Provide insulated grounding bushings on all metallic feeder conduitsterminated within panelboards, switchboards or enclosed overcurrent devices. Provideinsulated grounding bushings on all branch circuit conduits where concentric knockoutsare used.

H. Connection to Other Systems: Provide all required grounding and bonding connectionsas specified herein and as required by the National Electrical Code.

1.7 SUBMITTALS


B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations ofgrounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including thefollowing:

1. Test wells.2. Ground rods.3. Ground rings.4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells,ground rings, and grounding connections for separately derived systems basedon NFPA 70B.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance valuesremain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommendcorrective action if they do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience andcapability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of theInterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testinglaboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.


1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNationalElectrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

D. Equipotential Ground Test Report: Provide equipotential ground testing of all patientcare areas with in the facility in accordance with NFPA 99. Once equipotential groundtesting is completed, submit equipotential ground test report at the end of this sectionto the engineer for review, prior to the final inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwiserequired by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm)

in diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:

1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-

treated fir or cypress or cedar.

D. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm) incross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types,sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.


B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kitmanufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) indiameter.

B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped,charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts.

1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches(1200 mm) long.

2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and strandedconductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No.2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank

when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellowstripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible tonormal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least threebands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housingservice equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch (25 mm), minimum, from wall 6 inches(150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame,across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect tohorizontal bus.


E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as

otherwise indicated.3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole orhandhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend abovefinished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provideNo. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through awaterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floorwith a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulatingsleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal flooropening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such asinserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole orhandhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWGminimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level orplumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cableshields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ringaround the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal itemsassociated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and groundingelectrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ringand for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches(150 mm) from the foundation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition tothose required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.2. Lighting circuits.3. Receptacle circuits.4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.6. Flexible raceway runs.7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.


8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor fromgrounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipmentgrounding bar terminal on busway.

9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulatedequipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-areapower panels and power-distribution units.

10. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor incircuits supplying x-ray equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners,heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor toeach unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulatedequipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable.Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment groundingconductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor fromraceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment groundingconductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwiseindicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by abranch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with anonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway entersenclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolateconductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate atequipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service,unless otherwise indicated.

G. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, andother communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated groundingconductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location,terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminategrounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) groundingbus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet groundingterminal.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unlessotherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placingconductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.


B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electricalpower system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor atclosest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sizedsame as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or finalgrade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and asotherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damagingcoating, if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from othergrounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholesare specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures," andshall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwiseindicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Settop of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection andmaintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not topenetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-typeconnection is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, inconduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metalwater service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to mainmetal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where adielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on streetside of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor ateach end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypasswater meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream fromequipment shutoff valve.


G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductorsof associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumperto bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of eachcorner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet(18 m) apart.

I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each buildingstructure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter ofbuilding.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring andfor taps to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building foundation.

J. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according toNFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller thanNo. 4 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor withinbase of foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and toanchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to buildinggrounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency toperform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform thefollowing field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

C. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits havebeen energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure groundingterminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests atground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace ofprecipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other thannatural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or otherartificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.


3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and groundrod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter inalphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include thenumber of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observationsof weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describemeasures taken to improve test results.

D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notifyArchitect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION


EQUIPOTENTIAL GROUND TEST REPORT

FACILITY NAME: PROJECT NAME:________________________________

DATE: TESTED BY:________________

MAXIMUM TEST INTERVALS: NAME:________________GENERAL CARE - 12 MOS.CRITICAL CARE - 6 MOS. COMPANY:_________________WET LOCATIONS - 12 MOS.

TYPE METER USED AND EXTERNAL NETWORK IF USED:

NOTE: MAXIMUM READINGS PERMITTED - 20 MV NEW - CONSTRUCTION /RENOVATION

0.1 OHM NEW - CONSTRUCTION / RENOVATION

RoomNo.

AREA TYPE

Description(C) = CRITICALCARE(G) = GENERALCARE

VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT IMPEDANCEMEASUREMENT

REMARKS - IFVOLTAGE READINGSMORE THAN 20MV INEXISTING CONST.NOTE TESTS &INVESTIGATIONREQUIRED.

NO. OFRECEPTS.

NO.OFOTHER

MAX.READINGINMILIVOLTS

NO. OFRECEPTS.

MAXREADING INOHMS

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS16073 - 1

SECTION 16073

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensiveengineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performancerequirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight ofsupported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight ofsupported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loadscalculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of fivetimes the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Steel slotted support systems.2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations forthe following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.4. Equipment supports.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "StructuralWelding Code - Steel."


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated componentsfor field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:


a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.g. Wesanco, Inc.


3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according toMFMA-4.

4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyestercoating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according toMFMA-4.

6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 incheso.c., in at least 1 surface.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:


a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.d. Seasafe, Inc.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer anddesigned for use with those items.

4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metalitems may be stainless steel.

5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting ofthreaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electricalconductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape ofconductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported.Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steelplates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electricalitems or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portlandcement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacitiesappropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productsby one of the following:

1) Hilti Inc.2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.3) MKT Fastening, LLC.4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use inhardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacitiesappropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productsby one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.3) Hilti Inc.4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar toMSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitablefor attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply withASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fitdimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" forsteel shapes and plates.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports forelectrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Spacesupports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by schedule in NECA 1, where itsTable 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shallbe 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steelslotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be usedfor 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communicationsystems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specifiedin this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC,and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted inNFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components sostrength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specifiedloading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall beweight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchorand fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by thefollowing methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion

anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided

with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregateconcrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.


6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lockwashers and nuts.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junctionboxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached tosubstrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchoragerequirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoidreinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, andelevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areasimmediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used forshop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-paintedsurfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for cleaning andtouchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop painton miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and applygalvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION16075 - 1

SECTION 16075

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.3. Underground-line warning tape.4. Warning labels and signs.5. Instruction signs.6. Equipment identification labels.7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and systemcomponents used in identification signs and labels.

C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style,mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features withrequirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiringdiagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required bycodes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughoutProject.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and paintingof surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum lengthof color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Color for Printed Legend:

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather-and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securingends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylicsleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and tostay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylicsleeves, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable itidentifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 incheswide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATIONMATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 milsthick by 1 to 2 inches wide.


B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuitidentification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- thick aluminum sheet,with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots forpermanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punchedfor use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet andpolyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tagmanufacturer.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitiveadhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access toequipment, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled forfasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets incorners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and withcolors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners formounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA INFRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36INCHES."


2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs upto 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalentprocess. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, bythermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed,with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screwmounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8inch.

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter heightshall be 1 inch.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nyloncable ties.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum.3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 paintingSections.

1. Exterior Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer.

1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.


2. Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry:

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a block filler.

1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

3. Exterior Ferrous Metal:

a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer.

1) Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.

4. Exterior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):


1) Primer: Exterior zinc-coated metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.

5. Interior Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):


1) Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.

6. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry:

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a block filler.

1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

7. Interior Gypsum Board:


1) Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

8. Interior Ferrous Metal:


1) Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.


9. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):


1) Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steelmachine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- wideblack stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length ofraceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGHVOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes atlegends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of afloor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts,

exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with"DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches high, with self-adhesivevinyl labels. Repeat legend at 10-foot maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, andBranch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systemswith color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands:

1. Fire Alarm System: Red.2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.4. Security System: Blue and yellow.5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.7. Control Wiring: Green and red.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No.1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes usecolor-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set ofconductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.


F. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more thanthree branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tapewrite-on tags. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuitnumber.

G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and listsource and circuit number.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent withsystem used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape forpower, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Limit use ofunderground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify systemvoltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, orother access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover ofequipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unlessotherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flushpanelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

K. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation andmaintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Installinstruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for systemor equipment operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend ona red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructionsat equipment used for power transfer.


L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designationlabel that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation andMaintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment,central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks ofeach system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal,monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

M. Engraved Plastic Laminate Nameplates:1. Provide engraving phenolic plastic laminate, in sizes and thicknesses indicated,

engraved with 1/16 inch thick lines with square standard pica lettering andwording as specified herein.a. black face with white core plies (letter color) for normal systemsb. kelly green with white letters for equipment systemsc. bright orange with white letters for critical systemsd. bright yellow with black letters for life safety systemse. red with white letters for fire alarm

2. Punch for mechanical fastening, except where adhesive mounting is necessarybecause of substrate.

3. Material thickness shall be 1/16 inch. Titles shall be 1/2 inch high and all otherlettering shall be 1/4 inch high.

4. Provide beveled edge in order to eliminate sharp corners.5. Provide self-tapping stainless steel round head screws. Provide contact type

permanent adhesive where screws cannot or shall not penetrate the substrate.Adhesive nameplate shall be permanently installed.

N. Labeling Instructions:1. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a

single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where 2lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

2. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.3. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate

for viewing from the floor.

O. Equipment to Be Labeled:1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.3. Transformers.4. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.5. Disconnect switches.6. Enclosed circuit breakers.7. Motor starters.8. Push-button stations.9. Power transfer equipment.10. Contactors.11. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

12. Battery inverter units.13. Battery racks.14. Power-generating units.


15. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.16. Television/audio components, racks, and controls.17. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators.18. Monitoring and control equipment.19. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.20. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for

signal and control functions.21. Light switch cover plate. Provide 3/16 inch engraved and "filled in" lettering

indicating panelboard and circuit number "where fed from" for all switches. Fillred coverplates with white filler. Fill white coverplates with black filler.

22. Receptacle coverplate: Provide 3/16 inch engraved and "filled in" letteringindicating panelboard and circuit number "where fed from" for all receptacles. Fillred coverplates with white filler. Fill white coverplates with black filler.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenientviewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, usingmaterials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardwareappropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shallcompletely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings incontact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of wallsand floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximumintervals in congested areas.

1. Use following colors for color bands and for color coding:

System ColorLife Safety Bright YellowCritical Branch Bright OrangeEquipment Branch Kelly Green

Essential Distribution Purple(from Generator to GeneratorDistribution Panel)Normal Power Royal BlueMiscellaneous Communications BrownFire Alarm RedTelephone\Computer Black


Nurse call WhiteTV Light PinkPaging GreyPhysiological Monitoring Beige

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use thecolors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authoritieshaving jurisdiction permit, field applied.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.b. Phase B: Red.c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for aminimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices ortaps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possibleunwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface ofconductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuousunderground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finishedgrade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench orconcrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 paintingSections.

END OF SECTION

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES16120 - 1

SECTION 16120

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.


1. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for cabling usedfor voice and data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience andcapability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of theInterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testinglaboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.


1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNationalElectrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification inEngineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural componentsas they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.3. General Cable Corporation.4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.5. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.5. Tyco Electronics Corp.


C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES



C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.


2.4 SLEEVE SEALS



C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acomparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. Calpico, Inc.3. Metraflex Co.4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

D. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween sleeve and cable.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG andlarger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWGand larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS ANDWIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors inraceway.

F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, singleconductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors in raceway.

I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, singleconductors in raceway.

K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord withstainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

M. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

N. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceedmanufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structuralmembers, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and SeismicRestraints."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section"Electrical Identification."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's publishedtorque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use thosespecified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possessequivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unsplicedconductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application offirestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.


2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or moresides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wallassemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated duringconstruction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cableunless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require differentclearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry andwith approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space betweensleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of jointaccording to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestopmaterials according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-typeflashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves andmechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space betweenpipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Sizesleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installingmechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cablematerial and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeveseals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts againstpressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.


3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies torestore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 7 Section"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspectionsand prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has beenenergized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feedingthe following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETAAcceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days afterFinal Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables andconductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers sosplices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scanof each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measuretemperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Providecalibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifiessplices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation ofdeficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations afterremedial action.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

RACEWAYS AND BOXES16130 - 1

SECTION 16130

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electricalwiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-coverenclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations,sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.b. Frame and cover design.c. Grounding details.


d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.e. Joint details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For wireways with factory-applied texture and colorfinishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required for wireways,prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

E. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the followingitems are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of theitems involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit

groups with common supports.

F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

G. Source quality-control test reports.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Alflex Inc.3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.5. Electri-Flex Co.6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.7. Maverick Tube Corporation.8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.


C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

F. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

G. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

I. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application andenvironment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, set-screw type.3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch,

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

J. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connectorassemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway jointsfrom corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.3. Arnco Corporation.4. CANTEX Inc.5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.6. Condux International, Inc.7. ElecSYS, Inc.8. Electri-Flex Co.9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.


C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Use only 1” PVC or larger for underground installations and in slabs.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. Hoffman.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unlessotherwise indicated.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate withwireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer'sstandard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by


a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVCwith texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by


a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.e. Panduit Corp.f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).


g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.2. EGS/Appleton Electric.3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.4. Hoffman.5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, withgasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum withgasketed cover.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flushlatch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standardenamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistantpaint.

J. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel andremovable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.


4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS



C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.


2.7 SLEEVE SEALS




1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. Calpico, Inc.3. Metraflex Co.4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

D. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular spacebetween sleeve and cable.




2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes forcompliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of productssupplied.


1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent

testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineershall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certificationcomplying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried (1” minimum).4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-RoadwayLocations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by HeavyVehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with aSafety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concreteunits, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only:Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according toSCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock.b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling

units.c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except useLFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for

Environmental Air: EMT.


8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts:EMT.

9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber orCommunications Cable: EMT.

10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4,stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. 1” or larger for underground and inslabs.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings,unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use withthat material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating afterinstalling conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fittingmanufacturer.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Wherealuminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install innonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

G. Raceways shall be marked at all junction boxes or panels with the circuit number.Label shall be permanent and legible.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified inPart 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and SeismicRestraints."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run exceptfor communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwiseindicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:


1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to mainreinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close toslab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles withexpansion fittings.

3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC beforerising above the floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulatingbushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic linewith not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at eachend of pull wire.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fillthem with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in aflush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent platesor surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries ofrefrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that islocated where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that hasstraight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide typeand quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperaturechange.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperaturechange.

c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation:125 deg F temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inchper foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.


3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston settingselected according to manufacturer’s written instructions for conditions at specificlocation at the time of installation.

N. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell ofmasonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

O. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

P. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floorsurface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Preparetrench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work

toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move withexpansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmlyhand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength.After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make finalconduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compactionas specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and atbuilding entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbowsfor stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles andequipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, andencase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extendsteel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipmentpad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations atequipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width andalong the centerline of conduit.


3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depthcoordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required forproper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacentundisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Setcovers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, andinsulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and asindicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for futurecables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's writteninstructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Sizeholes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings areinstalled.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application offirestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no sidegreater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inchesand 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wallassemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated duringconstruction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.


H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and racewayunless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require differentclearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry andwith approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space betweensleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location ofjoint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestopmaterials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves andmechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear spacebetween pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve forinstalling mechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for racewaymaterial and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeveseals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts againstpressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies torestore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials andinstallation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-PenetrationFirestop Systems."

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, andcabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended bymanufacturer.


2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coatingrecommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

LIGHTING CONTROLS16138 - 1

SECTION 16138

LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes manually operated lighting controls with electrically operatedcircuit breakers and control module.

B. This Section includes manually operated, PC-based, digital lighting controls withexternal signal source, relays, electrically operated circuit breakers, and controlmodule.

C. This Section includes individually addressable lighting control devices communicatingwith data-entry and -retrieval devices using DALI protocol.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for time switches, photoelectricswitches, occupancy sensors, and multipole contactors.

2. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for dimming control components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BACnet: A networking communication protocol that complies with ASHRAE 135.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. DALI: Digital addressable lighting interface.

D. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementinginteroperable control devices and networks.

E. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than50 V or for remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

F. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment statusdata, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event andalarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.

G. PC: Personal computer; sometimes plural as "PCs."


H. Power Line Carrier: Use of radio-frequency energy to transmit information overtransmission lines whose primary purpose is the transmission of power.

I. RS-485: A serial network protocol, similar to RS-232, complying with TIA/EIA-485-A.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For control modules, power distribution components, manual switchesand plates, and conductors and cables.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled forspecific application on this Project.

1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components,and clearance and access requirements.

2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in thisSection and devices furnished with power distribution system components.Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, datagateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristicsof network and other data communication lines.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclatureand presentation with a block diagram.

C. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible withconnected monitoring and control devices and systems specified in other Sections.

1. Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that provecompatibility of inputs and outputs.

2. For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements frommanufacturers that input and output devices meet interoperability requirements ofthe network protocol.

D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with

data files.3. Device address list.4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operation andprogramming of digital and analog devices.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution componentsthrough one source from a single manufacturer.


C. Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.

D. Comply with protocol described in IEC 60929, Annex E, for DALI lighting controldevices, wiring, and computer hardware and software.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection ofcompatible components.

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lightingcontrol functions.

2. Coordinate lighting controls with BAS. Design display graphics showing buildingareas controlled; include the status of lighting controls in each area.

3. Coordinate lighting controls with that in Sections specifying distributioncomponents that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and controlequipment.

B. Coordinate lighting control components specified in this Section with componentsspecified in Division 16 Section "Panelboards."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of lighting controls that fail in materials or workmanshipor from transient voltage surges within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of software input/output to execute switching or dimmingcommands.

b. Failure of modular relays to operate under manual or software commands.c. Damage of electronic components due to transient voltage surges.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.3. Extended Warranty Period Failure Due to Transient Voltage Surges: Eight years.4. Extended Warranty Period for Electrically Held Relays: 10 years from date of

Substantial Completion.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Electrically Held Relays: Equal to 20 percent of amount installed for each sizeindicated, but no fewer than 30 relays.

2. Electrically Operated, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Equal to 5 percent ofamount installed for each size indicated, but no fewer than 10 circuit breakers.

1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software supportfor two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install andprogram software upgrades that become available within two years from date ofSubstantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgradeshall include new or revise licenses for use of the software.

1. Provide 30-day notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and toallow Owner to upgrade computer equipment, if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.2. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company.3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.4. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc.5. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems.6. Square D; Schneider Electric.7. Watt Stopper (The).

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Expandability: System shall be capable of increasing the number of control functionsin the future by 25 percent of current capacity; to include equipment ratings, housingcapacities, spare relays, terminals, number of conductors in control cables, and controlsoftware.

B. Performance Requirements: Manual switch operation sends a signal toprogrammable-system control module that processes the signal according to its


programming and routes an open or close command to one or more electricallyoperated circuit breakers in the power-supply circuits to groups of lighting fixtures orother loads.

C. Performance Requirements: Manual switches, an internal timing and control unit, andexternal sensors or other control signal sources send a signal to a PC-basedprogrammable-system control module that processes the signal according to itsprogramming and routes an open or close command to one or more electricallyoperated circuit breakers in the power-supply circuits, or routes variable commands toone or more dimmers, for groups of lighting fixtures or other loads.

D. Performance Requirements: Individually addressable devices (such as electronicballasts, dimmers, and manual switches) are operated from digital signals receivedthrough a DALI-compliant bus, from data-entry and -retrieval devices (such as PCs,personal digital assistants (PDAs), hand-held infrared programming devices, wiredEthernet hubs, wireless IEEE 802.11 hubs). Devices also report status to data-entryand -retrieval devices though the bus.

2.3 CONTROL MODULE

A. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205);microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Output circuitsshall be switched on or off by internally programmed time signals or by program-controlled analog or digital signals from external sources. Output circuits shall be pilot-duty relays compatible with power switching devices. An integral keypad shall providelocal programming and control capability. A key-locked cover and a programmedsecurity access code shall protect keypad use. An integral alphanumeric LCD or LEDshall display menu-assisted programming and control.

B. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205);microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Unit shall beprogrammable for control of indicated number of output circuits. Output circuits shallbe switched on or off by internally programmed time signals or by program-controlledanalog or digital signals from external sources. Output circuits shall be pilot-duty relayscompatible with power switching devices, all located in other enclosures. An integralkeypad shall provide local programming and control capability. A key-locked cover anda programmed security access code shall protect keypad use. An integralalphanumeric LCD shall display manual-control and programming steps. Modules andtheir associated control panels shall include the following features:

1. Multichannel output with 16 channels.2. Multiple inputs and multichannel output arranged for 16 channels.3. Multiple inputs for indicated occupancy sensors and hand-held programming

device.

C. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205);microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Control units shallbe programmable and capable of receiving inputs from indicated sensors and hand-held programmer. Output circuits shall be pilot-duty relays compatible with powerswitching devices. Output circuits shall include digital circuits arranged to transmit


control commands to remote preset dimmers. Modules and their associated controlpanels shall include the following features:

1. Multichannel output with 16 channels.2. Multiple inputs and multichannel output arranged for 16 channels.3. Multiple inputs for occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and dimming systems

with associated daylight sensors.

D. Control Module Description: Panelboard mounted; comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2,No. 205); microprocessor based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Controlunits shall be programmable and capable of receiving inputs from sensors and othersources. Panelboard shall use low-voltage-controlled, electrically operated, molded-case branch circuit breakers as prime power-circuit switching devices. Circuit breakersand a limited number of digital or analog, low-voltage control-circuit outputs shall beindividually controlled by control module. Line-voltage components and wiring shall beseparated from low-voltage components and wiring by barriers. Control module shallbe locally programmable. Panelboard shall also comply with Division 16 Section"Panelboards."

E. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14);microprocessor-based, programmable, control unit; mounted in preassembled, modularrelay panel. Low-voltage-controlled, latching-type, single-pole lighting circuit relaysshall be prime output circuit devices. Where indicated, a limited number of digital oranalog, low-voltage control-circuit outputs shall be supported by control unit and circuitboards associated with relays. Control units shall be capable of receiving inputs fromsensors and other sources. Line-voltage components and wiring shall be separatedfrom low-voltage components and wiring by barriers. Control module shall be locallyprogrammable.

F. Control Module Description: Programmable, PC-based unit with 17-inch color videomonitor and keyboard for graphic display and programming of system status and tooverride breaker status; and to display status of local override controls and diagnosticinformation. If the control module is applied to emergency lighting units, control unitshall indicate failure of normal power and that the lighting units are, or are not, poweredby the alternate power source.

1. Display: Single graphic display for programming lighting control panelboards.2. Display: Separate graphic displays for programming each lighting control

panelboard.3. Interoperability: Control module shall be configured to connect with other control

systems using RS-485 network to enable remote workstations to use controlmodule functions.

4. Interoperability: Control module shall be configured to connect to LonWorks-compliant network, resulting in extending control to any network-compliantdevices such as occupancy switches.

5. System Memory: Nonvolatile. System shall reboot program and reset timeautomatically without errors after power outages up to 90 days' duration.

6. Software: Lighting control software shall be capable of linking switch inputs torelay outputs, retrieving links, viewing relay output status, controlling relayoutputs, simulating switch inputs, setting device addresses, and assigning switchinput and relay output modes.


7. Automatic Time Adjustment: System shall automatically adjust for leap year anddaylight saving time and shall provide weekly routine and annual holidayscheduling.

8. Astronomic Control: Automatic adjustment of dawn and dusk switching.9. Demand Control: Demand shall be monitored through pulses from a remote

meter and shall be controlled by programmed switching of loads. Systemcapability shall include sliding window averaging and programming of loadpriorities and characteristics. Minimum of two different time-of-day demandschedules shall execute load-management control actions by switching outputcircuits or by transmitting other types of load-control signals.

10. Confirmation: Each relay or contactor device operated by system shall haveauxiliary contacts that provide a confirmation signal to the system of on or offstatus of device. On or off status confirmation for each electrically operatedcircuit breaker shall be provided by an auxiliary contact or by a sensing device atload terminal.

a. Software shall interpret status signals, provide for their display, and initiatefailure signals.

b. Lamp or LED at control module or display panel shall identify status ofeach controlled circuit.

11. Remote Communication Capability: Allow programming, data-gatheringinterrogation, status display, and controlled command override from a PC at aremote location over telephone lines. System shall include modem,communications and control software, and remote computer compatibilityverification for this purpose.

12. Local Override Capability: Manual, low-voltage control devices shall overrideprogrammed shutdown of lighting and shall override other programmed controlfor intervals that may be duration programmed.

13. Automatic Control of Local Override: Automatic control shall switch lighting off iflighting has been switched on by local override. Comply with provisions inCalifornia Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6.

14. Automatic battery backup shall provide power to maintain program and systemclock operation for 90 days' minimum duration when power is off.

15. Programmed time signals shall change preset scenes and dimmer settings.16. Daylight Balancing Dimming Control: Control module shall interpret variable

analog signal from photoelectric sensor and shall route dimming signals todimming fluorescent ballast control circuits. Signal shall control dimming offixture so illumination level remains constant as daylight contribution varies.

17. Daylight Compensating Switch Control: Control module shall interpret a presetthreshold illumination-level signal from a photoelectric relay and shall activaterelays controlling power to selected groups of lighting fixtures to turn them on andoff to maintain adjustable minimum illumination level as daylight contributionvaries.

18. Energy Conservation: Bilevel control of special ballasts or dimming circuits tocomply with local energy codes.

19. Flick Warning: Programmable momentary turnoff of lights shall warn thatprogrammed shutoff will occur after a preset interval. Warning shall be repeatedafter a second preset interval before end of programmed override period.


20. Diagnostics: When system operates improperly, software shall initiate factory-programmed diagnosis of failure and display messages identifying problem andpossible causes.

21. Additional Programming: In addition to system programming by the PC,individual control modules shall be programmable using data-entry and -retrieval(such as PCs, personal digital assistants (PDAs), hand-held infraredprogramming devices, wired Ethernet hubs, wireless IEEE 802.11 hubs).

2.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS

A. Modular Relay Panel: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14) and UL 916(CSA C22.2, No. 205); factory assembled with modular single-pole relays, powersupplies, and accessory components required for specified performance.

1. Cabinet: Steel with hinged, locking door.

a. Barriers separate low-voltage and line-voltage components.b. Directory: Mounted on back of door. Identifies each relay as to load

groups controlled and each programmed pilot device if any.c. Control Power Supply: Transformer and full-wave rectifier with filtered dc

output.

2. Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil,momentary-pulsed type.

a. Low-Voltage Leads: Plug connector to the connector strip in cabinet andpilot light power where indicated.

b. Rated Capacity (Mounted in Relay Panel): 20 A, 125-V ac for tungstenfilaments; 20 A, 277-V ac for ballasts.

c. Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity.d. Mounting: Provision for easy removal and installation in relay cabinet.

B. Electrically Operated, Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Panelboard: Comply withNEMA PB 1 and UL 50 (CSA C22.2, No. 94), UL 67 (CSA C22.2, No. 29), UL 489(CSA C22.2, No. 65), and UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205).

1. Cabinets: In addition to requirements specified below, comply with Division 16Section "Panelboards."

2. Electrically Operated, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on type.

a. Switching Endurance Ratings: Certified by manufacturer or by a nationallyrecognized testing laboratory (NRTL) for at least 20,000 open and closeoperations under rated load at 0.8 power factor.

b. Minimum 30,000 open and close operations with load equal to circuit-breaker trip rating and consisting of 100 percent tungsten filament load.

c. Minimum 30,000 open and close operations with load equal to circuit-breaker trip rating and consisting of 100 percent fluorescent ballasts ratedfor 10 percent total harmonic distortion.


d. Listed and labeled as complying with UL SWD, HCAR, and HID ratings bya national recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) acceptable to authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

C. Line-Voltage Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of 120- and 277-V ac, solid-state control panels.

D. Line-Voltage Surge Suppression: Field-mounting surge suppressors that comply withDivision 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for Category A locations.

E. Line-Voltage Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of 120- and 277-V ac, solid-state control panels or field-mounting surge suppressors that comply withDivision 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for Category A locations.

2.5 DALI NETWORK MATERIALS

A. Network Power Supply and Router: Interface device connecting TCP/IP controlnetworks to DALI-compliant network.

1. DALI-Compliant Network Power Rating: One full-rated network for powering upto 64 addressable devices for each network; suitable for use with NFPA 70,Class 1 and Class 2 control circuits; and 16 V dc, 250 mA.

2. Primary Power: 120 or 277 V, field selectable; 12 VA.3. 10basT Ethernet port.4. LED indicator lights for Ethernet status (link, send, and receive), power-on, and

DALI network failure.

B. Lighting Control Software:

1. Five-tier hierarchical architecture; high-speed, parallel query; and distributed-logic processing scalable from single rooms to full campuses.

2. Automatic backup for all settings and parameters.3. TCP/IP network protocol.4. Interactive with other building management systems at TCP/IP level.5. At least three security levels.6. Support the full suite of DALI commands and device parameter settings.7. Scheduling modules to provide building-wide scene scheduling.8. Billing modules to track energy use for multiple tenants and able to produce

monthly billing statements.9. Support load shedding, peak shaving, sweeps with local override, and other

energy-conservation measures.10. Able to report individual device status, including inoperative lamps, ballast failure

detection, and dimmer position.

2.6 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES

A. Push-Button Switches: Modular, momentary-contact, low-voltage type.

1. Match color specified in Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices."


2. Integral green LED pilot light to indicate when circuit is on.3. Internal white LED locator light to illuminate when circuit is off.

B. Manual, Maintained Contact, Full- or Low-Voltage Switch: Comply with Division 16Section "Wiring Devices."

C. Wall-Box Dimmers: Comply with Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices."

D. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Division 16 Section "WiringDevices."

E. Legend: Engraved or permanently silk-screened on wall plate where indicated. Usedesignations indicated on Drawings.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG,complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors notsmaller than No. 22 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors andCables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller thanNo. 14 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

D. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable with copperconductors, complying with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6 for horizontal copper cableand with Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION


B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except where installed in accessible ceilingsand gypsum board partitions. Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors andCables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points.Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductormanufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices inCategory A locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.


E. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions,unless otherwise indicated.

F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal stripsin terminal cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes.

G. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section"Electrical Identification."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,including connections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test for circuit continuity.2. Verify that the control module features are operational.3. Check operation of local override controls.4. Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components

selected by Architect.

3.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backupcopies of software and user-supplied values. Provide current licenses for software.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of SubstantialCompletion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors and to assist Owner'spersonnel in making program changes to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide upto two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls and software training forPC-based control systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES16140 - 1

SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Twist-locking receptacles.3. Receptacles with integral surge suppression units.4. Wall-box motion sensors.5. Isolated-ground receptacles.6. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.7. Solid-state fan speed controls.8. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.9. Communications outlets.10. Pendant cord-connector devices.11. Cord and plug sets.12. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet

assemblies.


1. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for workstationoutlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used forpremarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall platethrough one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtainall wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and onesource.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match productsinstalled and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified withlabels describing contents.

1. Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.2. Floor Service Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.3. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets

installed, but no fewer than two.4. TVSS Receptacles: One for every 10 of each type installed, but no fewer than

two of each type.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the followingmanufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply withNEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG.b. Leviton; 5362-IG.c. Pass & Seymour; IG6300.

2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connectedonly to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherentelectrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacleconstruction and not dependent on removable parts.

C. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; TR8300.b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG.c. Leviton; 8300-SGG.d. Pass & Seymour; 63H.


2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article,"Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply withNEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator lightthat is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20.b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 1449,with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-levelrating of 400 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device toindicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

B. Duplex TVSS Convenience Receptacles:


a. Cooper; 5362BLS.b. Hubbell; HBL5362SA.c. Leviton; 5380.

2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R.

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Cooper; IG5362BLS.b. Hubbell; IG5362SA.c. Leviton; 5380-IG.

3. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R.Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green groundingscrew terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting


strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent onremovable parts.

D. Isolated-Ground, Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:


a. Cooper; IG8300HGBLS.b. Hubbell; IG8362SA.c. Leviton; 8380-IG.

2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R.Comply with UL 498 Supplement SD. Equipment grounding contacts shall beconnected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and withinherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral toreceptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Hubbell; IG2310.b. Leviton; 2310-IG.

2. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, andUL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the greengrounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation frommounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and notdependent on removable parts.

2.6 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attachingexternal cable grip.

2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provisiondesigned for corresponding connector.

2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors torequirements of equipment being connected.


1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket;with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus aminimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacletype for connection.

2.8 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (fourway).

b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way),CS1224 (four way).

c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way).

d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (threeway), 20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is"ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221L.b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.c. Leviton; 1221-2L.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V,20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.



a. Cooper; 1995.b. Hubbell; HBL1557.c. Leviton; 1257.d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches,120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.


a. Cooper; 1995L.b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.c. Leviton; 1257L.d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.9 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-offswitches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching.Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve.On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.Illuminated when "OFF."

D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trimpotentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable ofconsistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.10 FAN SPEED CONTROLS

A. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches andaudible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. Comply with UL 1917.

1. Continuously adjustable slider, 5 A.2. Three-speed adjustable slider, 1.5 A.

2.11 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V.b. Hubbell; WS1277.


c. Leviton; ODS 10-ID.d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000.e. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200.

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..

B. Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V.b. Leviton; ODS 15-ID.

2. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to20 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq.ft..

C. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATP1600WRP.b. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW.c. Pass & Seymour; WA1001.d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100.

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30minutes, 110-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft.

D. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP.b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW.c. Watt Stopper (The); DT-200.

2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-typesensing, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field ofview, and a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft..

E. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATP120HBRP.b. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW.c. Pass & Seymour; HS1001.d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100-3.


2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30minutes, 150-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft..

F. Exterior Occupancy Sensors:


a. Leviton; PS200-10.b. Watt Stopper (The); EW-100-120.

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, weatherproof, adjustable timedelay up to 15 minutes, 180-degree field of view, and 110-foot detection range.Minimum switch rating: 1000-W incandescent, 500-VA fluorescent.

2.12 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished stainless steel.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and

listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3Rweather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.13 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular, with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwiseindicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening.

2.14 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories.3. Square D/ Schneider Electric.4. Thomas & Betts Corporation.5. Wiremold Company (The).


B. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box withmultichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floorservice outlet assembly.

1. Service Outlet Assembly: Pedestal type with services indicated.2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor

thickness.3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch cored openings and reestablish

fire rating of floor.5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG

conductors and a minimum of two, 4-pair, Category 6voice and datacommunication cables.

2.15 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.2. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use asa complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

2.16 SERVICE POLES

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and datacommunication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in polenear floor.

1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- square cross section, with height adequate to extendfrom floor to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels forpower wiring and voice and data communication cabling.

2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positiveconnection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.

3. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard painted finish and trim combination.4. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors

and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 3 or 5 voice and data communicationcables.

5. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6configuration 5-20R units.


2.17 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect,unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.3. TVSS Devices: Blue.4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unlessotherwise noted.

B. All switch and receptacle boxes shall have a brace attached to the free side of the box.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Caddy H23, H4 or H6.

C. No welding of electrical boxes, cabinets or panelboards to any materials as part of thisinstallation will be allowed.

D. Devices:

1. Wire shall be terminated using device screws (no back stabs).2. No pass thru or splicing on devices (pig tails only).3. No stranded wire under screw terminations will be permitted; use Sta-Kon’s or

Lubs.4. No solid wire in flex conduit that feeds vibration causing equipment.5. Outlets and switches will be 20 amps. Commercial grade.

E. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not placewall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes withrouters that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the racewaysystem, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not crossa joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

F. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced orterminated on devices.


2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for thepurpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from strandedwire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions ofNFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign

matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large

enough.

G. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or thatshow signs that they were installed before building finishing operations werecomplete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time toconnect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, untilthe last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches inlength.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrapsolid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by themanufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits,splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to

hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

H. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontallymounted receptacles to the right.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin orneutral blade at the top.

I. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes andremount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover roughwall opening.

J. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.


K. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimensionvertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switchesunder single, multigang wall plates.

L. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement ofpartitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Usehot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face ofplate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations inNFPA 99.

2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digitalreadout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not

acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely

mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at

the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defectivedevices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioningunits and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Test straight blade convenience outlets in patient-care areas for the retention force ofthe grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4oz.

END OF SECTION

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES16145 - 1

SECTION 16145

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches.2. Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches.3. Indoor occupancy sensors.4. Outdoor motion sensors.5. Lighting contactors.6. Emergency shunt relays.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other constructionthat penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVACequipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acomparable product by one of the following:

1. Intermatic, Inc.2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.4. Square D; Schneider Electric.5. TORK.6. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units withalphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: SPST.2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.3. Program: 8 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday

schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.4. Program: 2 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points

for each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides theweekly operation on holidays.

5. Programs: 8 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 8on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule.

6. Programs: 8 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 2on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule with skip-a-day weekly schedule.

7. Programs: 8 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 2on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each dayof the week.

8. Programs: 8 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 40on-off operations per week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides theweekly operation on holidays.

9. Programs: 8 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 40on-off operations per week, plus 4 seasonal schedules that modify the basicprogram, and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation onholidays.

10. Program: and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operationon holidays.

11. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-offfunction of a program on selected channels.


12. Astronomic Time: All channels.13. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.

C. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Type complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: SPST.2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.3. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off

function of a program.4. Astronomic time dial.5. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.6. Skip-a-day mode.7. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures,

minimum of 16 hours.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Intermatic, Inc.2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.3. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.4. Square D; Schneider Electric.5. TORK.6. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input;complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on andturn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell toprevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.

2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1,

IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem

mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensorto the north sky exposure.

C. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA to operateconnected load, relay, or contactor coils; complying with UL 773.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on andturn-off levels within that range.

2. Time Delay: 30-second minimum, to prevent false operation.3. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base.


2.3 INDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.2. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics.3. Eaton Electrical Inc; Cutler-Hammer Products.4. Intermatic, Inc.5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.6. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems.7. Novitas, Inc.8. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.9. Square D; Schneider Electric.10. TORK.11. Touch-Plate, Inc.12. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Ceiling-Mounted Photoelectric Switch: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separaterelay unit mounted on luminaire, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceivedby the eye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors are not acceptable.

1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying withUL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shallbe 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

3. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on andturn-off levels within that range.

4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadbandadjustment.

5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

C. Skylight Photoelectric Sensors: Solid-state, light-level sensor; housed in a threaded,plastic fitting for mounting under skylight, facing up at skylight; with separate relayunit mounted on luminaire, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by theeye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors are not acceptable.

1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying withUL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.


3. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1000 to 10,000 fc, with an adjustment for turn-onand turn-off levels within that range.

4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadbandadjustment.

5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.


2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Hubbell Lighting.2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.4. Novitas, Inc.5. RAB Lighting, Inc.6. Sensor Switch, Inc.7. TORK.8. Watt Stopper (The).

B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relayunit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area isoccupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off,adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying withUL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.


4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind

hinged door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normaloperation of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off

when selected lighting level is present.

C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination ofPIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology orcombination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the fieldby operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any

portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., anddetect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches ineither a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within acircular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.


2.5 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS (PIR)


1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell Company.2. Hubbell Lighting.3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.4. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.5. RAB Lighting, Inc.6. TORK.7. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Performance Requirements: Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures rangingfrom minus 40 to plus 130 deg F, rated as raintight according to UL 773A.

1. Operation: Turn lights on when sensing infrared energy changes betweenbackground and moving body in area of coverage; with a time delay for turninglights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outdoorjunction box.

b. Relay: Internally mounted in a standard weatherproof electrical enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind

hinged door.

3. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.4. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 1 to 20 fc; keep lighting off during

daylight hours.

C. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portionof a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..

D. Detection Coverage: Up to 35 feet, with a field of view of 90 degrees Up to 52.5 feet,with a field of view of 270 degrees.

E. Lighting Fixture Mounted Sensor: Suitable for switching 300 W of tungsten load at120- or 277-V ac.

F. Individually Mounted Sensor: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay,complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.


2. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normaloperation of the sensor.


2.6 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.4. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control.5. Hubbell Lighting.6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.7. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems.8. Square D; Schneider Electric.9. TORK.10. Touch-Plate, Inc.11. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with fusibleswitch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of loadserved, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballastwith 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault currentat the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.4. Provide with control and pilot devices.

2.7 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or acomparable product by one of the following:

1. Lighting Control and Design, Inc.

B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel withmanual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.

1. Coil Rating: 120 V.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller thanNo. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Conductors andCables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductorsnot smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables."


C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors notsmaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage ofareas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's writteninstructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminatestructure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Minimumconduit size shall be 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited andnonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's writteninstructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions,unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal stripsin junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section"Electrical Identification."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors

at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.




1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has beenenergized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjusttime delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of SubstantialCompletion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions.Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for thispurpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstrationrequirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified inDivision 13 Section "Lighting Controls."

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 1Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR16231 - 1

SECTION 16231

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power supplywith the following features:

1. Diesel engine.2. Unit-mounted cooling system.3. Remote-mounting control and monitoring.4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads.5. Load banks.6. Outdoor enclosure.


1. Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensorsand relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of aparameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of thenominal value of the parameter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include ratedcapacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Inaddition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator.2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.



1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set andother components specified.

2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints andfor designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professionalengineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structureand to supported equipment. Include base weights.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer and testing agency.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but

not identical, to those tested on prototype unit.3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified

requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements.5. Report of sound generation.6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified inDivision 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project forready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and sourceof supply.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained andapproved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time fromInstaller's place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators andseismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based ontesting and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assembliessimilar to those indicated for this Project.


B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles ofProject site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergencymaintenance repairs.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience andcapability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of theInterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testinglaboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components throughone source from a single manufacturer.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with ASME B15.1.

G. Comply with NFPA 37.

H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with NFPA 99.

J. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local governmentrequirements.

L. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements formaximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted bygenerator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake anddischarge, and other components of installation.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilitiesoccupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and thenonly after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirementsindicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption ofelectrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's writtenpermission.


B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the followingenvironmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation ofperformance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Castanchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirementsare specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrationsfor remote radiators. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "RoofAccessories."

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliarycomponents that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months'full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated serviceorganization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer,and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended bymanufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts andsupplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of

each.3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Caterpillar; Engine Div.2. Kohler Co.; Generator Division.3. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending onconcrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mountingframe to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment andgenerator-set center of gravity.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required tooperate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name

and address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine ispermissible to meet specified performance.

a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by theContract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied togenerator size installed.

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltagefrom no load to full load.

3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain withinthe steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent ofrated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constantload within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside thesteady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.


6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within thesteady-state operating band within three seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shallnot exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor,determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at systemoutput terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-loadcurrent for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically,without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion causedby nonlinear load.

a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltageregulator.

10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers andsmaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oiltemperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removablecontainer with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools,or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System:

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flowunder starting and load conditions.

2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returnsexcess fuel to source.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacketsystem. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heatercapacity.

G. Governor: Mechanical.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.


1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percentwater, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant fromcold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstandmaximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gageglass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulatescoolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature asrecommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber andouter covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, andnoncollapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping andequipment connections.

I. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with remote radiator and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Configuration: Vertical air discharge.2. Radiator Core Tubes: Aluminum.3. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from

cold start to 110 percent load condition.4. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand

maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gageglass and petcock.

5. Fan: Driven by multiple belts from engine shaft.6. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent

water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.7. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates

coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature asrecommended by engine manufacturer.

J. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer andselected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's enginebackpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after

installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less.

K. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filterelement and "blocked filter" indicator.

L. Starting System: 12-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-crankingcycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "ProjectConditions" Article.


2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases fromengine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1

"Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twicewithout recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable lengthindicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connectionaccessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish andthermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged tomaintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperaturewithin range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessoriesrequired to support and fasten batteries in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltageregulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type.Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automaticallyafter battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage isachieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched toa lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode untilbattery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltagesfor variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging atlow temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardlessof input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicatecharging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and closecontacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoringpanel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output ofbattery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide abattery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoringpanel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE

A. Comply with NFPA 30.

B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fueloil tank. Features include the following:

1. Tank level indicator.2. Capacity: Fuel for twenty four hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated

power output.3. Vandal-resistant fill cap.


4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction.

C. Provide full tank of fuel after testing.

2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on thecontrol and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts inone or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping ofgenerator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator setstarts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. Whengenerator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangementsautomatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remoteemergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on thegenerator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of sameswitch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specifiedsystem or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator setand initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts downgenerator set.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic systemcontrols, engine gages, instrument transformers, generator disconnect switch or circuitbreaker, and other indicated components shall be grouped in a combination controland power panel. Control and monitoring section of panel shall be isolated from powersections by steel barriers. Panel features shall include the following:

1. Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complyingwith NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring,and temperature rise shall comply with UL 891.

2. Switchboard Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Division 16 Section"Switchboards."

3. Switchgear Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Division 16 Section"Switchgear."

4. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.

D. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 2system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter.2. AC ammeter.3. AC frequency meter.4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.7. Running-time meter.8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.


10. Fuel tank derangement alarm.11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.12. Generator overload.

E. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:

1. AC voltmeter.2. AC ammeter.3. AC frequency meter.4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.7. Running-time meter.8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.10. Start-stop switch.11. Overspeed shutdown device.12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.13. Coolant low-level shutdown device.14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device.15. Fuel tank derangement alarm.16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.17. Generator overload.

F. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devicesand include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and othersupporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C drycontacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-linktransmission of indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections toterminals are covered in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

H. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Overcrank shutdown.2. Coolant low-temperature alarm.3. Control switch not in auto position.4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.5. Battery low-voltage alarm.

I. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed belowwithout differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced,clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.

1. Engine high-temperature shutdown.2. Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown.3. Overspeed shutdown.4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown.


5. Engine high-temperature prealarm.6. Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm.7. Fuel tank, low-fuel level.8. Low coolant level.

J. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarmconditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound foreach alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal withoutaltering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing ofinitiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet andfaceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

K. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated;and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated;complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating.3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices.4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated;complying with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay andinstantaneous.

2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other


C. Generator Circuit Breaker: Insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated;complying with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay andinstantaneous.

2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other


D. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case type, 100 percent rated.

1. Rating: Matched to generator output rating.


2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or byother protective devices.

E. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor currentlevel in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time,and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generatorprotector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generatordisconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits.Protector shall perform the following functions:

1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overloadequivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for thisalarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.

2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percentof rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds.

3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damagepoint of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generatordisconnect device, and shuts down the generator set.

4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery ofrated voltage to avoid overshoot.

F. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals forground-fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarmindications.

2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall berotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection forother voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent ofrated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Dripproof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance asspecified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.


I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windingsabove dew point.

J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Subtransient Reactance: 13 percent, maximum.

2.8 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to componentsrequiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools.Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.

B. Description: Prefabricated or preengineered walk-in enclosure with the followingfeatures:

1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framedbuilding erected on concrete foundation.

2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads.3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation

when engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air

circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in

coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature withinoperating limits required by engine-generator-set components.

8. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of systemcomponents within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof anddrainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shallbe closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is notoperating.

D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing;arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electricalconnection.

1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source isavailable.

2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are bothunavailable.


E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.

2.9 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so drivenload will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connectionsare specified in Division 16 Sections.

2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber,arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factorycut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Material: Standard neoprene.2. Durometer Rating: 50.3. Number of Layers: Two.

B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismicrestraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension dueto wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; andadjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking duringinstallation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of thespring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.11 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish overcorrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model,constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical orequivalent accessories.


1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator setand other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for thisProject. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are notidentical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run.3. Maximum power.4. Voltage regulation.5. Transient and steady-state governing.6. Single-step load pickup.7. Safety shutdown.8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests

by Owner's representative.9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, forcompliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packagedengine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actuallocations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation andalignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections oraccessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimumdeflection of 1 inch on 4-inch- high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor boltsinstalled in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Division 16Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers butnot specified to be factory mounted.


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawingsindicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged enginegenerator to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and with flexibleconnectors.

D. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

E. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

1. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuelsystems outside the building are specified in Division 2 Section "Fuel OilDistribution."

2. Diesel fuel piping, valves, and specialties inside the building are specified inDivision 15 Section "Fuel Oil Piping."

3. Natural- and LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution outsidethe building are specified in Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution."

F. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 15 Section "MechanicalIdentification" and Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.5 FACTORY TESTING

A. General: Perform factory tests prior to shipment. Include the following:

1. Demonstrate proper operation of all safety devices.

2. Conduct load tests utilizing combination resistive and reactive load banks atgenerator rated power factor as follows:

Load Hourshalf 1three quarter 1full 4

3. At the end of two hours at full load, the engine-generator shall be block loadedfrom no load to full load for a total of two times, and the voltage dip shall berecorded by a strip chart recorder.


4. Record current, voltage, frequency, water temperature, lube oil pressure, andlube oil temperature every 15 minutes.

5. Perform factory testing in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Submitrequest and test verification to the Engineer. All travel related expenses (air fare,mileage, lodging, meals, etc.) shall be paid for by the Contractor/Manufacturerand included in the bid.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspectionsand prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized servicerepresentative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visualand mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems"specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with testparameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that areadditional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-loadpickup test.

a. Conduct a two-hour run with generator operating, utilizing maximumavailable load. If available load is less than 100% of the generator's rating,then furnish and add loads to obtain 100% generator loading. Load banksshall be resistive load type.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer'swritten instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available batteryterminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolytelevel and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load testand a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery afterdischarge.

d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.


4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing andfloat-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, andintegrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during systemoperation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding40-inch wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verifythat back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowablelimits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to

measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-loadincreases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content iswithin specified limits.

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating fromgenerator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake anddischarge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levelswith required values.

E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable tostandards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Makecalibration records available for examination on request.

G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retestuntil no leaks exist.

H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirmproper motor rotation and unit operation.

I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controlsand equipment.

J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest untilspecified requirements are met.

L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings andmeasured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion oftests.

M. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after FinalAcceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each busconnection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessibleto portable scanner.


1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperatureor to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration recordfor device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifiesterminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results.Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, andobservations after remedial action.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer toDivision 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION16289 - 1

SECTION 16289

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted TVSS for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distributionand control equipment.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices with integral TVSS.2. Division 16 Section "Switchboards" for factory-installed TVSS.3. Division 16 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed TVSS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor(s), both singular and plural; also, transientvoltage surge suppression.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingweights, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

C. Product Certificates: For TVSS devices, from manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For TVSS devices to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.

D. Comply with NEMA LS 1.

E. Comply with UL 1283 and UL 1449.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilitiesoccupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and thenonly after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirementsindicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed electrical serviceinterruptions.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's writtenpermission.

B. Service Conditions: Rate TVSS devices for continuous operation under the followingconditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominalsystem operating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F.3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing.4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet above sea level.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of field-mounted TVSS devices to allow adequate clearances formaintenance.

B. Coordinate TVSS devices with Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring andControl."


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Cord-Connected, Plug-in Surge Suppressors: Manufacturer'sstandard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electronic equipmentconnected to circuits protected by surge suppressors.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged withprotective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS


1. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).2. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions.3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.5. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.6. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.7. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.8. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Comply with UL 1449.2. Modular design (with field-replaceable modules).3. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.4. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.5. Integral disconnect switch.6. Redundant suppression circuits.7. Redundant replaceable modules.8. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses,

neutral bus, and ground bus.9. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.10. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.11. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.


12. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normallyclosed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse onfailure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limitingdevice. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

13. Four-digit transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240 kA per phase.

D. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described inIEEE C62.41.2

1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V or208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V or 400 V for 208Y/120 V.2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V or 400 V for 208Y/120 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V or 400 V for 208Y/120 V.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120 V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shallbe as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.2. Line to Ground: 400 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with highleg shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.2. Line to Ground: 400 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire, deltacircuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V or 1000 V for 240 V.2. Line to Ground: 2000 V for 480 V or 1000 V for 240 V.

2.2 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS


1. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).2. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions.


3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.5. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.6. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.7. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.8. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Comply with UL 1449 3rd edition.2. Modular design (with field-replaceable modules).3. Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449, and matching or exceeding

the panelboard short-circuit rating and redundant suppression circuits; withindividually fused metal-oxide varistors.

4. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.6. Integral disconnect switch.7. Redundant suppression circuits.8. Redundant replaceable modules.9. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.10. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.11. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.12. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse onfailure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limitingdevice. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

13. Four-digit transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per phase.

D. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described inIEEE C62.41.2:

1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V or208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V or 400 V for 208Y/120 V.2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V or 400 V for 208Y/120 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V or 400 V for 208Y/120 V.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shallbe as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.2. Line to Ground: 400 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.


G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with highleg shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.2. Line to Ground: 400 V.3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire, deltacircuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V or 1000 V for 240 V.2. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V or 800 V for 240 V.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1.

B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded toservice entrance ground.

B. Install TVSS devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or busesbetween suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Donot exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral andground.

1. Provide multiple, 60-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means forTVSS unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,including connections.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's writteninstallation requirements.

C. Perform tests and inspections.




1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETAATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certifycompliance with test parameters.

2. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized,test for compliance with requirements.

3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panelboards, controlterminals, data terminals to their sources until TVSS devices are installed andconnected.

B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with theTVSS installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, andreconnect immediately after the testing is over.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to maintain TVSS devices.

END OF SECTION

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS16410 - 1

SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Receptacle switches.4. Shunt trip switches.5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).6. Molded-case switches.7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand theeffects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation ofany parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and theunit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, andcomponent indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, andmanufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating

of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type ofovercurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers,accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actualtest of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity andlocate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification isbased and their installation requirements.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.

F. Manufacturer's field service report.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers toinclude in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to itemsspecified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include thefollowing:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switchesand circuit breakers.


2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating ofovercurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type ofovercurrent protective device.




B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrentprotective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, fromsingle source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions forenclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, andadjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under thefollowing conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilitiesoccupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and thenonly after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirementsindicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption ofelectric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written

permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components withequipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearancesand required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but nofewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productindicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 andNEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specifiedfuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked withcover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 andNEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specifiedfuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked withcover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specifiedfuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked withcover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 andNEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specifiedfuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked withcover in closed position.

F. Accessories:


1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminumground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded andbonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being groundedand bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses arespecified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged toactivate before switch blades open.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.9. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, andinterlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 andNEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept threepadlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept threepadlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 andNEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept threepadlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

F. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminumground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded andbonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being groundedand bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged toactivate before switch blades open.


5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.

2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.3. Littelfuse, Inc.

B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kAinterrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism andClass J fuse block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlockedwith cover in closed position.

D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, withprimary and secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity tooperate shunt trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

E. Accessories:

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.2. Oiltight red ON pilot light.3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is

opened and closed.5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 120-V ac coil voltage.7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with

NFPA 72.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, withinterrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.


C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-leveloverloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustablemagnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with thefollowing field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-throughratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or onopening of fuse compartment door.

H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-poleconfigurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

I. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

J. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensitydischarge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickupand time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt tripunit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module withfunctions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system,specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without

intentional time delay.8. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts

mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breakercontacts.

9. Alarm Switch: One NO and NC contact that operates only when circuit breakerhas tripped.


10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; keyshall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlockingground-fault protection function.

12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.13. Accessory Control Power Voltage: 120-V ac.

2.5 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES



B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered

type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup andtime-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit;and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without

intentional time delay.6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts

mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.7. Alarm Switch: One NO and NC contact that operates only when switch has

tripped.8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be

removable only when switch is in off position.9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for

interlocking ground-fault protection function.10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: 120-V ac.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, andUL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.


1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers forcompliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance ofthe Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform heightunless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and bracketsand temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.







D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker,component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstratecompliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosedswitch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connectionsare accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scanof each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date ofSubstantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed tomeasure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normalvalues. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damagedand malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not passtests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosedswitches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation ofdeficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate asrecommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16 Section"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination".

END OF SECTION

TRANSFER SWITCHES16415 - 1

SECTION 16415

TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.2. Bypass/isolation switches.3. Remote annunciation systems.4. Remote annunciation and control systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights,operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showingminimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features anddevices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch,bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlockingprovisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.

C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration

instructions, including software, where applicable.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training,parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eighthours from time of notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience andcapability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of theInterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testinglaboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable toauthorities having jurisdiction.


C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from asingle manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


G. Comply with NFPA 110.

H. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. AC Data Systems, Inc.b. Caterpillar; Engine Div.c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.d. Generac Power Systems, Inc.e. GE Zenith Controls.


f. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division.g. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.h. Russelectric, Inc.i. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading andtotal system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percentof switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed byprotective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditionsindicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switchand trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installationlocation.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceedvoltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according toIEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test ofNEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid orelectric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in bothdirections.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-ratedcurrent between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching.

Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall haveseparate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral poleswitched simultaneously with phase poles.

H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicatedfor oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch isinstalled.


J. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and otherunits indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within enclosure to controlheater.

K. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.

1. Float type rated 10 A.2. Ammeter to display charging current.3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.

L. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transferswitches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, orannunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched withremote device.

M. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with ShopDrawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markersat terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified inDivision 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiringindicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, orbottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

N. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 andUL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediateposition stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or bothsources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuitautomatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contactsoperates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30seconds.

E. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator orannunciator and control panel.

F. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply withNEMA AB 1, UL 489, and UL 869A.


G. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions andcharacteristics:

1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation.2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both

power sources not exceeding 100 ms.3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors

confirming both sources are present and acceptable.

a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator.b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only

when the 2 sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum,and plus or minus 5 percent maximum voltage difference.

4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-maketransfer.

H. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only whenthe two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship andfrequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transferwhen both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can becompleted within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources arewithin 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

I. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnectmotors before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time intervalafter transfer. Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external toautomatic transfer switch. Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads isadjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and settings are as indicated. Relay contactshandling motor-control circuit inrush and seal currents are rated for actual currents tobe encountered.

J. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutralposition arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, withan intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustablefrom 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwiseindicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unlessboth sources are live.

K. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percentof pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delaytransfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, andfactory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator.Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factoryset for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.


4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes,and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage orsustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has beenrestored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch

normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "NormalSource Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved"Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throwcontacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatictransfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless ofcondition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolatedand normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence atremote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes,and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remoteengine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

13. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch startsengine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time,then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiatesexercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periodsare adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercisecycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciserfeatures include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with andwithout load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.

2.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions forindicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following:


1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls.

2. Switch position.3. Switch in test mode.4. Failure of communication link.

B. Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch.

1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored.2. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and

identity of load it serves.3. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.4. Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel.

2.5 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: Include the following functions for indicated transfer switches:

1. Indication of sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settingsof transfer-switch controls.

2. Indication of switch position.3. Indication of switch in test mode.4. Indication of failure of digital communication link.5. Key-switch or user-code access to control functions of panel.6. Control of switch-test initiation.7. Control of switch operation in either direction.8. Control of time-delay bypass for transfer to normal source.

B. Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or communication link shallnot affect functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure ofcommunication link, automatic transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone,self-contained operation. Automatic transfer-switch sensing, controlling, or operatingfunction shall not depend on remote panel for proper operation.

C. Remote Annunciation and Control Panel: Solid-state components. Include thefollowing features:

1. Controls and indicating lights grouped together for each transfer switch.2. Label each indicating light control group. Indicate transfer switch it controls,

location of switch, and load it serves.3. Digital Communication Capability: Matched to that of transfer switches

supervised.4. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment.Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay


settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength testcomplying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements andaccording to seismic-restraint details. See Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports andSeismic Restraints."

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges.Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond themaximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required forseismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 16 Section"Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

C. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

E. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors tocontrol and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended bymanufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary toaccommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency toperform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized servicerepresentative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation,including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, testfor compliance with requirements.


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground withinsulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits.Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply withmanufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and

integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operationalfunction for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switchesand of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.c. Verify time-delay settings.d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.

e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations.

f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct valuesexceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power,and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devicesfor power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

D. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, testfor compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground withinsulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits.Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply withmanufacturer's specified minimum resistance.


a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and

integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operationalfunction for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switchesand of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.c. Verify time-delay settings.d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-

switch operations.f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power,and engine cool-down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devicesfor power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

E. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings andmeasured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag toeach tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after FinalAcceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels sojoints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan ofeach switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperatureor to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration recordfor device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switcheschecked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficienciesdetected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.


3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment asspecified below. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

END OF SECTION

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS16420 - 1

SECTION 16420

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual.2. Full-voltage magnetic.3. Reduced-voltage magnetic.4. Reduced-voltage solid state.5. Multispeed.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 16 Section "Variable Frequency Controllers" for general-purpose, ac,adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variabletorque loads in ranges up to 200 hp.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquakemotions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technicaldata on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure typesand finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controllerenclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.b. Factory-installed devices.c. Nameplate legends.d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of

OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDsin combination controllers.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, andcomponents, from manufacturer.





F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installedcomponents.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker andMCP trip settings.

3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.


4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogrammingreduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have beeninstalled, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motornameplate full-load currents.

H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motorshave been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor runningoverload protection suit actual motors to be protected.




B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.


D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 towithstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controlsfor Electrical Systems."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature toprevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes,water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them fromweather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loosepacking and flammable materials from inside controllers.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under thefollowing conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.


B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems infacilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditionsand then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according torequirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption ofelectrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Architect's written

permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other constructionincluding conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain requiredworkspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors andpanels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formworkrequirements are specified in Division 3.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.



1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each sizeand type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size andtype, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic

controller installed.5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic

contactor installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS



a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical

Distribution.c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing.3. Surface mounting.4. Red pilot light.5. Additional Nameplates: FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing switches.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.




2. Configuration: Nonreversing.3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20

tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actualprotected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting.5. Red pilot light.

C. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.




2. Configuration: Nonreversing.3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20

tripping characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched tonameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and having appropriateadjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type.


4. Surface mounting.5. Red pilot light.6. Additional Nameplates: FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing controllers.7. N.O. and N.C. auxiliary contact.

D. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.




2. Configuration: Nonreversing.3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltagerating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide;assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or loadwiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary andsecondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices andremotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 200 VA.

6. Melting Alloy Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.b. Class 20 tripping characteristic.c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

7. Bimetallic Overload Relays:


protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.d. Ambient compensated.e. Automatic resetting.


8. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.b. Sensors in each phase.c. Class 20 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage

and current unbalance and single phasing.d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting.e. Analog communication module.

9. N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.10. External overload reset push button.

E. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magneticcontroller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.




2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or boltpads to accommodate Class J fuses.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover inclosed position.

c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch bladesopen.

3. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch.b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in

closed position.c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades

open.

4. MCP Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to complywith available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.


b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover inclosed position.

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.d. N.C. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current

(withstand) rating to 100 kA.

5. MCCB Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to complywith available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic tripelement for short circuits.

b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker framesizes 250 A and larger.

c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover inclosed position.

d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle.e. N.C. alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped.

2.2 REDUCED-VOLTAGE MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Comply withNEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A; closed-transition; adjustable time delay ontransition.

B. Reduced-Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Reduced voltage, electrically held.




2. Configuration:

a. Wye-Delta Controller: Four contactors, with a three-phase startingresistor/reactor bank.

b. Part-Winding Controller: Separate START and RUN contactors, field-selectable for 1/2- or 2/3-winding start mode, with either six- or nine-leadmotors; with separate overload relays for starting and running sequences.

c. Autotransformer Reduced-Voltage Controller: Medium-duty service, withintegral overtemperature protection; taps for starting at 50, 65, and 80percent of line voltage; two START and one RUN contactors.


3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltagerating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide;assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or loadwiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary andsecondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices andremotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 200 VA.

6. Melting Alloy Overload Relays:


protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

7. Bimetallic Overload Relays:


protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.d. Ambient compensated.e. Automatic resetting.

8. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.b. Sensors in each phase.c. Class 20 tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage

and current unbalance and single phasing.d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting.e. Analog communication module.

9. N.C., isolated overload alarm contact.10. External overload reset push button.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions atinstalled location.


1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, Type 4X.3. Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factoryinstalled in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.

a. Push Buttons: Lockable types; momentary as indicated.b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test.c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

2. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; resettable.3. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and

plus or minus two percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide selector switcheswith an off position.

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provideadjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensationin Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject tohumidity and temperature swings.

F. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 3Renclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidityand temperature swings.

G. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors andsubject to direct and extended sun exposure.

H. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

I. Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the line side of overloadrelays.

J. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; unwired.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, forcompliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that arewet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniformheight unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting onlightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, providefreestanding racks complying with Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports forElectrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch nominal-thicknessconcrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 3Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwiseindicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter ofconcrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend throughconcrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supportedequipment.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and bracketsand temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements inDivision 16 Section "Fuses."

F. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplatefull-load amperes after motors have been installed.

G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.


H. Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the line side of overload relays.If connected to the load side of overload relays, adjust overload heater sizes toaccommodate the reduced motor full-load currents.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply withrequirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's centralcontrol system. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Control-VoltageElectrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices whereapplicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-controldevices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual andautomatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.








1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connectingsupply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipmentinstallation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component,connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit.4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of

motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notifyArchitect before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with testparameters.


8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections andprepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-poleenclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections areaccessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scanof each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of SubstantialCompletion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed tomeasure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normalvalues. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damagedand malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosedcontrollers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficienciesdetected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.


B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors areconnected to the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustableinstantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-loadampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldownbetween starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments untilmotors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes(or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximumsettings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers at 50 percent.

E. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stopsequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

F. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16 Section"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according tomanufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energizedand placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids priorto Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosedcontrollers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

END OF SECTION

PANELBOARDS16442 - 1

SECTION 16442

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protectivedevice, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated.Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulationsof installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrentprotective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graftpaper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.



D. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions afterload balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified inDivision 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protectivedevices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrentprotective device that allows adjustments.




B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components,and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions forpanelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces andother items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.


1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; installtemporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.



A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete,and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperatureand humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of theconstruction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unlessotherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilitiesoccupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and thenonly after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirementsindicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption ofelectric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's writtenpermission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with otherconstruction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical andother types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearancerequirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances andrequired clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formworkrequirements are specified in Division 3.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees torepair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP)

Types: Two spares for each panelboard.3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size

and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed

for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door withinhinged trim cover.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboardfront with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure;integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning andpretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finishconsisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent

protective devices and other components.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment

grounding conductors; bonded to box.


3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors;insulated from box.

4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and ULlisted as suitable for nonlinear loads.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor

material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on

extra-capacity neutral bus.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboardsor load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protectivedevices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessaryappurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A andSmaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.


F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purposecontroller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primaryand secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


1. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable withoutdisturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purposecontroller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junctionbox equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


1. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacityto meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-leveloverloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustablemagnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.


3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug orfield-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-throughratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699;120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit withadjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, andground-fault indicator.

e. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communicationmodule with functions and features compatible with power monitoring andcontrol system specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoringand Control."

f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55percent of rated voltage.

g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltagewithout intentional time delay.

h. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a"contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverseof circuit-breaker contacts.

i. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only whencircuit breaker trips.

j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation;key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

k. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; forinterlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream ordownstream devices.

l. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled tooperate as a single unit.

m. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breakerhandle in on or off position.

n. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in onposition.


C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockablehandle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified inDivision 16 Section "Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and numberof poles.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: One normally open and normally closed contact(s) thatoperate with switch handle operation.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrentprotective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged orrusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installationtolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and bracketsand temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessedpanelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.


G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space orspace designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduitsinto raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties aftercompleting load balancing.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; providewarning signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use acomputer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying withrequirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards witha nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16Section "Electrical Identification."







1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connectingsupply, feeder, and control circuit.






3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of eachpanelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessibleto portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scanof each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature orto detect significant deviations from normal values. Providecalibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifiespanelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation ofdeficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate asrecommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after FinalAcceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/workingschedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hourservices such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing,transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all loadreadings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within apanelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meetthis minimum requirement.


3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according tomanufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

FUSES16491 - 1

SECTION 16491

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed controllers andmotor-control centers.

2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switchesfuseholders and panelboards.

3. Plug-fuse adapters for use in Edison-base, plug-fuse sockets.4. Spare-fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have beenadjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses withadjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuserating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperatureadjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance,electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

FUSES16491 - 2

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, andmaintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operationand Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, fromsingle source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location andapplication.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.


E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg For more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factorsto fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximumfuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but nofewer than two Insert number of each size and type.

FUSES16491 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratingsconsistent with circuit voltages.

2.3 PLUG FUSES

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

2.4 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS

A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-basefuseholders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable onceinstalled.

2.5 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged doorand key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent sparecapacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- high letters on exterior of door.4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged orphysically damaged.

FUSES16491 - 4

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and otherconditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses ofsizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must beapplied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay.2. Feeders: Class L, time delay.3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.4. Other Branch Circuits: Class J, time delay.5. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

B. Plug Fuses:

1. Motor Branch Circuits: Edison-base type, dual-element time delay.2. Other Branch Circuits: Edison-base type, dual-element time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable withoutremoving fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure thatadapters are irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16Section "Electrical Identification" and indicating fuse replacement information on insidedoor of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR LIGHTING16511 - 1

SECTION 16511

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Division 16 Section "Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable controlsystems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers forincandescent lamps.

3. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipolelighting relays and contactors.

4. Division 16 Section "Stage Lighting" for theatrical lighting fixtures and theircontrols.

5. Division 16 Section "Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.


G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.3. Ballast.4. Energy-efficiency data.5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish

data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers,and Grilles."

6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate soundpower level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according tostandards specified in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.8. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting

fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to thoseindicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualifiedindependent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shallbe certified by the manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with acurrent accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory AccreditationProgram (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicatedimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, andaccessories.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, onwhich the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on inputfrom installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures.2. Suspended ceiling components.3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be

attached.4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets.b. Speakers.


c. Sprinklers.d. Smoke and fire detectors.e. Occupancy sensors.f. Access panels.

5. Perimeter moldings.

D. Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission inInterior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each sample shall include the following:

1. Lamps: Specified units installed.2. Accessories: Cords and plugs.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlledfixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include inemergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided bymanufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National VolunteerLaboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by anindependent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testingindicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.


E. FMG Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeledfor indicated class and division of hazard by FMG.

F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete withpower and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.


2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standardfor judging the completed Work.

3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work ifundisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with otherconstruction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVACequipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form inwhich manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair orreplace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanshipwithin specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date ofSubstantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and proratedwarranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit SignBatteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shallapply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballastmanufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanshipwithin specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of SubstantialCompletion.

2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date ofSubstantial Completion.

C. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form,made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps thatfail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, withinspecified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least oneof each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed.Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit.4. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type.5. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings thatintroduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the

product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either thenamed product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturersspecified.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessedfixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test accordingto NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according toNEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according toNEMA LE 5B.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support toprevent warping and sagging.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakageunder operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools.Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components fromfalling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.


H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwiseindicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance toyellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness isindicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conductedelectromagnetic-interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtureswith one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

K. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heatextraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Division 15Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

1. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-bootassemblies.

2. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity.3. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp

cavity at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units.4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume.5. Static Fixture: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches

active units.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwiseindicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall bedesigned for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.

1. Sound Rating: A.

2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.6. BF: 0.85 or higher.


7. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11

and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one ormore lamps fail.

B. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply withANSI C82.11 and the following:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3. Sound Rating: A.4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

C. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor,Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

D. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory-wired with ballast arrangementsand bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification orrewiring in the field.

E. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting andoperating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed foruse with indicated lamp types.

F. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR,Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequencyinterference for consumer equipment.

G. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming controlsystem and lamp type indicated.

H. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the lightoutput of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.


a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control

system and lamp type indicated.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11,designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full lightoutput unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.3. Sound Rating: A.4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations

on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumerequipment.

11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.

B. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control

system and lamp type indicated.

2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted withinlighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an outputof 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit andswitched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening

fixture or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normalpower and demonstrates unit operability.


b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicatestrickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power

transfer relay.6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infraredreceiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply,providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiatescode-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failureis annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering oneor more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connectunswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixturecontinuously.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability.7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit



2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 andUL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts.3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models

designed to minimize audible fixture noise.


B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unlessotherwise indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.2. Sound Rating: A.3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent.4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.6. Power Factor: .90 or higher.7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations

on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumerequipment.

8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.9. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below for bi-level ballasts.10. Bi-Level Dimming Ballast: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of

the light output of the associated fixture between high- and low-level and off.

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.b. Low-Level Operation: 35 percent of rated lamp lumens.c. Compatibility: Certified by ballast manufacturer for use with specific bi-

level control system and lamp type indicated. Certified by lampmanufacturer that ballast operating modes are free from negative effect onlamp life and color-rendering capability.

11. Continuous Dimming Ballast: Dimming range shall be from 100 to 35 percent ofrated lamp lumens without flicker.

a. Ballast Input Watts: Reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal atlowest dimming setting.

b. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimmingcontrol system and lamp type indicated. Certified by lamp manufacturerthat ballast operating modes are free from negative effect on lamp life andcolor-rendering capability.

C. Auxiliary Instant-On Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switchesquartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when power outages occur.System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60percent light output.

2.7 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and letteringsize, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, 2 for each fixture, 20,000 hours of ratedlamp life.

2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.


3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit

voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normalvoltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery isautomatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss ofnormal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicatestrickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction oftested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of itsnormal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failedemergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiatescode-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Testfailure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

4. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:

a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs,and provide additional capacity in LED power supply for power connectionto remote unit.

b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs,except omit power supply, battery and test features. Arrange to receive fullpower requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently withmaster unit as a unified system.

2.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltagedrops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automaticallydisconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. Whennormal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery isautomatically recharged and floated on charger.


4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normalpower and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates tricklecharge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when

power is restored after an outage.8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit



2.9 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching proceduretest; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according toNEMA LL 1.

B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches,2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, andaverage rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches,1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, andaverage rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), colortemperature 4100 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start,and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).

2.10 HID LAMPS

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps are not allowed.

B. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature4000 K.


C. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

D. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature4000 K.

2.11 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" forchannel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy.Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount asingle fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealedstainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equippedwith threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps ineach fixture.

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as asupport element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or neareach fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceilingplans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with atleast two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab onlighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture ata safety factor of 3.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:


1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod

for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

D. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

F. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicatingand interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest todemonstrate compliance with standards.

END OF SECTION

LIGHTNING PROTECTION16670-1

SECTION 16670

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for structures and building site components.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components tobe used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirementswill be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded andisolated metal bodies.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing orcertification by UL.

D. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer ofroofing material.


F. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance ofLightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

G. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations ofgrounding features, including the following:

1. Ground rods.2. Ground loop conductor.



A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL, trained and approved for installation of unitsrequired for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label.2. LPI System Certificate.3. UL Master Label Recertification.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systemsand components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and buildingmaterials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, andbuilding finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofingmanufacturer and Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers'specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780 copper unless otherwise indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements orcomparable product by one of the following:

a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc.b. ERICO International Corporation.c. Harger.d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.e. Independent Protection Co.f. Preferred Lightning Protection.

2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the terminal atnot less than half the height of the terminal.


3. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 roofingSections.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper.

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor excepttinned.

E. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long.

F. Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: Stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A andNFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoidsharp bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors.2. Down conductors.3. Interior conductors.4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of

building.

D. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices andconnections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-weldedconnections in underground portions of the system.

E. Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices andconnections between conductors and other components.

1. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections maybe used only below the roof level.

F. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane andadhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet in length to lightningprotection components.


H. Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend aroundthe perimeter of structure.

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation.2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop.3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet of

grade level.

I. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loopconductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot intervals.

3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will acceleratecorrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded fromjunction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration orcorrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightningprotection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.

END OF SECTION

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM16721 - 1

SECTION 16721

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.3. System smoke detectors.4. Nonsystem smoke detectors.5. Heat detectors.6. Notification appliances.7. Firefighters' two-way telephone communication service.8. Magnetic door holders.9. Remote annunciator.10. Addressable interface device.11. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.12. Radio alarm transmitter.13. System printer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission,dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

B. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smokedetectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.



A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effectsof earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.


1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittingthem to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum.c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.3. Include battery-size calculations.4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector,

verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity,temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smokedetectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placementand support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarmindicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's writtenrecommendations.

6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout,grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connectiondiagram.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of eachaddressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply withperformance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed andsealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each,and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing andsensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, andcomponents, from manufacturer.




G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to includein emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified inDivision 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authoritieshaving jurisdiction and include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article"Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing andMaintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software.4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72

article of the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components.b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.7. Copy of NFPA 25.

I. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with

data files.3. Device address list.4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.



A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer forinstallation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm systemfrom single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with,and operate as, an extension of existing system.


E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.

F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarmcompany.

G. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placardby an FMG-approved alarm company.

H. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service tofacilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditionsand then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according torequirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption offire-alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Architect's writtenpermission.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until newequipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOTIN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put intoservice and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed fromthe building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existingdisconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.


1.10 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software supportfor two years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install andprogram software upgrades that become available within two years from date ofSubstantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgradeshall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system andto allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.



1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent ofamount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but nofewer than 1 unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofedcomponents.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, providecomparable product by one of the following:

1. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices andsystems:

1. Manual stations.


2. Heat detectors.3. Flame detectors.4. Smoke detectors.5. Duct smoke detectors.6. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.7. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.8. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.9. Fire-extinguishing system operation.10. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm

mode.8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.10. Activate emergency lighting control.11. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.12. Record events in the system memory.13. Record events by the system printer.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices andactions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices andactions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-

initiating devices.3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.6. Break in standby battery circuitry.7. Failure of battery charging.8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.


E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance andannunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event onsystem printer.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, voice capable, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed andlabeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasableprogrammable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the informationthrough failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the eventrecorder and printer.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allowfor adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate thesensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between humanoperator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components includingannunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component statusmessages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 3 line(s) of 80 characters,minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, andcontrol commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into thesystem for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72,Class A.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D.b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z.c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 2.d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

2. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers.


D. Stairwell Pressurization: Provide an output signal using an addressable relay to startthe stairwell pressurization system. Signal shall remain on until alarm conditions arecleared and fire-alarm system is reset. Signal shall not stop in response to alarmacknowledge or signal silence commands.

1. Pressurization starts when any alarm is received at fire-alarm control unit.2. Alarm signals from smoke detectors at pressurization air supplies have a higher

priority than other alarm signals that start the system.

E. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarmcontrol unit.

2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not

verified.

F. Elevator Recall:

1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevatorrecall. Alarm-initiating devices, except those listed, shall not start elevator recall.

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall beprogrammed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevatormachine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without timedelay.

a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may havea delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.

G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors atdoors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specificaddressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivitysettings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive,time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups.Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in systemmemory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

I. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm,supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.


J. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system withredundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in aseparate cabinet located in the fire command center.

1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission ofdifferent announcements to different zones or for manual transmission ofannouncements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shallcomply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL.

a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zonesand, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or inany combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type

recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns ofnotification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zonesand the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer tobackup units, on primary equipment failure.

K. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, ortrouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all otherprinted indications. Also print system reset event, including same information fordevice, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existingalarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

L. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisorysignals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters and digital alarm radiotransmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of thepower-supply module rating.

M. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger,and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

N. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind aplastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation anddescribe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functionaloperation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.


2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shallbe finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color;shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box.If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type; with integraladdressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type; with integral addressable module arranged tocommunicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarmcontrol unit.

3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates anintegral battery-powered audible speaker intended to discourage false-alarmoperation.

5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosurehinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be

mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminalsin the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuationto restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated andpower-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration,sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarmcontrol unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing andshall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.


B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall beable to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shallbe able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:




D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.




3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed foruse with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

E. Single-Station Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268A; operating at 120-V ac.2. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.


a. Detector Sensitivity: Smoke obscuration between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/footwhen tested according to UL 268A.

3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall bemounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed baseshall be designed for mounting directly to air duct. Provide terminals in the fixedbase for connection to building wiring.

a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listedfor use with the supplied detector.

4. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer forspecific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg For a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds afixed temperature of 190 deg F.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

D. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System:

1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F. NRTL listed for"regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuatorwires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, andfinished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short-circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.

2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same systempower supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm controlunit.

3. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall bereported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms oneach detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unitas separately identified zones.


4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliancesignal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screwterminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminalsfor system connections.

B. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear ornominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word"FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 110 cd.b. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be

determined with guards in place.4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red or white.

C. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by anNRTL.

2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.4. Mounting: Flush.

5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment ofspeaker location.

2.8 FIREFIGHTERS' TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE

A. Dedicated, two-way, supervised, telephone voice communication links between fire-alarm control unit, the fire command center, and remote firefighters' telephone stations.Supervised telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in a controlmodule. Provide the following:


1. Common-talk type for firefighter use only.2. Selective-talk type for use by firefighters and fire wardens.3. Controls to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use

simultaneously.4. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote

telephone is activated, it causes audible signal to sound and high-intensity lampto flash.

5. Selector panel controls shall provide for simultaneous operation of up to sixtelephones in selected zones. Indicate ground faults and open or shortedtelephone lines on the panel front by individual LEDs.

6. Display: Graphic to indicate location of caller.7. Remote Telephone Cabinet: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinet as indicated,

factory-standard red finish, with handset.

a. Install one-piece handset to cabinet with vandal-resistant armored cord.Silk-screened or engraved label on cabinet door, designating "Fire WardenPhone" or "Fire Emergency Phone."

b. With "break-glass" type door access lock.

8. Remote Telephone Jack Stations: Single-gang, stainless-steel-plate mountedplug, engraved "Fire Warden Phone" or "Fire Emergency Phone."

9. Handsets: push-to-talk-type sets with noise-canceling microphone stored in acabinet in the fire command center.

2.9 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and arecomplete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.10 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit foralarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall matchthose of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, andtesting.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicatinglights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge,silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.


2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a systemaddress for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiateelevator recall.

2.12 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote centralstation and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signalfrom fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial apreset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with centralstation(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longerthan 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signalindicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over theremaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration tothe central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiatethe local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall includethe following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.2. Programming device.3. LED display.4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.2. Address of the supervisory signal.

3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.5. Low battery.6. Abnormal test signal.7. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to centralstation.


2.13 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Printer shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL as an integral part of fire-alarm system.

2.14 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smokedetector, gong, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops ofcabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 16Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches abovethe finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 16Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operationalbefore making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising

station.

3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary toextend existing control functions to the new points. New components shall becapable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performanceof either system.

E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "InitiatingDevices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "InitiatingDevices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.


3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for

high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix Ain NFPA 72.5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-

air opening.6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a

lighting fixture.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubesso they extend the full width of duct.

G. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location withsprinkler rating and location.

H. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed withina dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarmcauses the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

I. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and eachsprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible fromnormal viewing position.

J. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling.Install bells and speakers on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operatingmechanism concealed behind a grille.

K. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn andat least 6 inches below the ceiling.

L. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

M. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72inches above the finished floor.

N. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

O. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated.Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100-mph wind loadwith a gust factor of 1.3 without damage.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and todoors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "DoorHardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm systemin this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the followingdevices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device


controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback isavailable at the device or system being controlled.

1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) atfirefighter smoke-control system panel.

2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel

supplies.7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler

system.9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.10. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or

phase-reversal condition.11. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirementsfor identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install aground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.






1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and systemdocumentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals ofFire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection"Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72;retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installedcomponents.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section ofthe "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according tomanufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-levelmeter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according tomanufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer'swritten instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm SystemRecord of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals ofFire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form"in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter inNFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation ofadded or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly,monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests andinspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72.Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarmsystem.

END OF SECTION

COMMUNICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY GENERAL PROVISIONS17010-1

SECTION 17010

COMMUNICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGYGENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Basic Requirements: The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, includingGeneral and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply towork of this section.

B. Provisions: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to makeready for use a complete Division 17 system as specified herein and shown on thedrawings.

C. Provide and Install: The word, "provide" where used on the Drawings or in this sectionshall mean, "furnish, install, mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready foroperation". The word "install" where used on the Drawings or in this Division shallmean, "mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". TheContractor shall perform all work required by, and in accordance with, the ContractDocuments.

D. Installation: Provide and place in satisfactory condition, ready for proper operation, allconduits, wires, cables, and other material needed for the complete Division 17systems required by the Contract Documents. Additional conduits and wiring shall beprovided wherever necessary to complete the installation of the specific equipmentprovided. Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operatingsystems. Provide all Division 17 systems and any necessary accessories per NEC,NFPA, ANSI, BICSI, EIA/TIA, state and local codes and ordinances. It is the intent ofthese Specifications that the Division 17 systems shall be suitable in every way for theservice required. All material and work, which may be reasonably implied as beingincidental to the work of this Contract, shall be provided at no additional cost to theContract.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General: The work provided under this specifications section shall include all labor,materials, permits, inspections and re-inspection fees, tools, equipment, transportation,insurance, temporary protection, temporary lighting, supervision and incidental itemsessential for proper installation and operation, even though not specifically mentionedor indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper installation andoperation of all Division 17 systems as indicated in the contract documents.

B. Minimum Requirements: The contract documents describe the minimum requirementsthat must be met for an acceptable installation.


C. Notices: Give all notices, file all Plans, pay all fees, obtain all permits and approvalsfrom authorities having jurisdiction. Include all fees in the Bid Price.

1.3 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. General: The Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exactlocations of conduit runs, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc. The locations ofequipment, appliances, fixtures, conduits, outlets, boxes and similar devices shown onthe Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as accepted by theEngineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placingof Division 17 systems work and in case of interference with other work, proceed asdirected by the Engineer and provide all labor and materials necessary to complete thework in an acceptable manner.

B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies found duringconstruction of the project and do not proceed with that portion of the project, until awritten definitive statement is received providing clear direction. If a conflict existsbetween the contract documents and any applicable code or standard, the moststringent requirement shall be included for this project. The Engineer shall make thedecision regarding questionable areas of conflict.

C. Wiring: Each Div 17 system wires shall be run in a separate conduit unless otherwiseshown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, conduit shall notbe installed exposed unless specifically directed to be exposed. Where conduits areshown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for acomplete raceway installation.

D. Surface Supports: Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shallbe supported by spacers to provide a clearance between wall and equipment.

E. Layout: Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or otherinstallation details. Provide all labor and materials necessary to install and place insatisfactory operation all power, control, lighting, and other communication systemsshown. All connections to equipment shall be made as required, and in accordancewith the accepted shop and manufacturer's setting drawings.

F. Coordination: Coordinate final equipment locations with governing Architectural andStructural drawings. Layout before installation so that all trades may install equipmentin spaces available. Provide coordination as required for installation in a neat andworkmanlike manner.

G. Existing Conditions: The Contractor shall check site and existing conditions thoroughlybefore bidding and advise Engineer of discrepancies prior to bid.

H. Final: The systems upon completion, shall be complete in every respect-clean,operating and properly adjusted and in perfect operating condition.


1.4 EQUIPMENT SIZE AND HANDLING

A. Coordination: Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment mustpass to reach its final location. If necessary, the equipment shall be required to beshipped in sections of specific sizes to permit the passing through the necessary areaswithin the structure.

B. Handling: All equipment shall be kept upright at all times. When equipment has to betilted for ease of passage through restricted areas during transportation, themanufacturer shall be required to brace the equipment suitably, to insure that the tiltingdoes not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.

1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Production: During the course of this project the contractor shall maintain record "as-built drawings". One set shall be maintained at the site and at all times and it shall beaccurate, clear, and complete, showing the actual location of all equipment asinstalled. The "As-Built" drawings shall show all Division 17 Systems work installedcomplete to the present stage of progress. These drawings shall be available forreview by the Architect/Engineer's field representatives at all times.

B. Completion: At the completion of the Work, transfer onto the second set of drawingsall changes marked in colored pencil and submit to the Architect/Engineers to makethe final punch list of the work completed under this Contract.

C. Final: Upon Contractor's completion of the Engineer's final punch list, transfer all "As-Built" conditions and all requirements by the Engineer to a reproducible set ofdrawings. Submit full size drawings and one (1) set of CAD disks for review andacceptance.

1.6 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations: The following abbreviations or initials may be used:

ABV CLG Above CeilingADA American Disabilities ActAFF Above Finished FloorAFG Above Finished GradeAL AluminumAMP AmpereANSI American National Standards InstituteASA American Standards AssociationAWG American Wire GaugeBC Bare CopperCAB CabinetC ConduitCCTV Closed Circuit TelevisionCLG CeilingCOAX Coaxial CableCOND Conductor


CONN ConnectionCPU Central Processing UnitCSTC Communications System Terminal CabinetCU CopperDC Direct CurrentDEG DegreeDCTC Door Control Terminal CabinetDO Draw OutDN DownEMT Communication Metallic TubingGND GroundHORIZ HorizontalIC IntercomIEEE Institute of Communication and Electronic EngineersIMC Intermediate Metallic ConduitIN InchesJB Junction BoxKVA Kilo-Volt-AmpsKW KilowattsLBS PoundsLED Light Emitting DiodeMAX MaximumMIC MicrophoneMIN MinimumMTD MountedMTG MountingMUX MultiplexorN NeutralNEC National Communication CodeNECA National Communication Contractors AssociationNEMA National Communication Manufacturers AssociationNFPA National Fire Protection AssociationNIC Not in ContractNL Non LinearNO NumberOSHA Occupational Safety and Health AdministrationP PolePB PullboxPNL PanelPR PairPWR PowerPROJ ProjectorPVC PolyvinylchlorideRECPT ReceptacleRSTC Radio/Sound Terminal CabinetS/N Solid NeutralSPKR SpeakerSW SwitchTEL TelephoneTEF Telecommunications Entrance FacilityTER Telecommunications Equipment Room


TR Telecommunications RoomTTB Telephone Terminal BoardTTC Telephone Terminal CabinetTVEC Television Equipment CabinetTYP TypicalV VoltW WireWP Weatherproof

1.7 CODES, FEES, AND STANDARDS

A. Application: The codes, standards and practices listed herein generally apply to theentire project and all specification sections. Other codes, standards or practices thatare more specific will be referenced within a particular specification.

B. Requirements: All articles, products, materials, fixtures, forms or types of constructioncovered in the specifications will be required to meet or exceed all applicablestandards of manufacturer, testing, performance, capabilities, procedures andinstallation according to the requirements of ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, NEC, BICSI andEIA/TIA referenced documents where indicated and the manufacturer's recommendedpractices. Requirements indicated on the contract documents which exceed but arenot contrary to governing codes shall be followed.

C. Compliance and Certification: The installation shall comply with the governing stateand local codes or ordinances. The completed communication installation shall beinspected and certified by all applicable agencies that it is in compliance with all codes.

D. Applicability: The codes and standards and practices listed herein, and theirrespective dates are furnished as the minimum latest requirements.

1. State of Florida2. Marion County3. City of Ocala

E. State Code: Florida Administrative Code

F. Building Code: Florida Building Code (2010 revisions).

G. Manuals: Accessibility Requirements Manual (January 1994) Florida Department ofCommunity Affairs.

H. Labels: All materials shall be new and free of defects, and shall be U.L. listed, bearthe U.L. label or be labeled or listed with an approved, nationally recognizedCommunication Testing Agency. Where no labeling or listing service is available forcertain types of equipment, test data shall be submitted to validate that equipmentmeets or exceeds available standards.

I. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.NFPA-70 (2008) National Electric Code


1.8 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK

A. Supervision: For each Div 17 System provide one field superintendent who has had aminimum of four (4) years previous successful experience on projects of comparablesizes and complexity. The Superintendent shall be present at all times when work isbeing performed. At least one member of each Div 17 system contracting firm shall holda State Certificate of Competency. Other supervision requirements that are morespecific will be referenced within a particular specification.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. General: Compare drawings and specifications with those of other trades and reportany discrepancies between them to the Architect. Obtain from the Architect writteninstructions to make the necessary changes in any of the affected work. All work shallbe installed in cooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Beforeinstallation, all Trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a mannerapproved by the Architect/Engineer.

B. Adjustments: Locations of conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodatethe work with interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact routingand location of all systems prior to fabrication or installation.

C. Priorities: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch.For example, plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whoseelevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevationscan be changed.

D. Modifications: Offsets and changes of direction in all conduit systems shall be madeas required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or notindicated on the drawings. Provide elbows, boxes, etc., as required to allow offsetsand changes to suit job conditions.

E. Replacement: All work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damageto other parts) of all other system components provided under this Contract requiringperiodic replacement or maintenance. All conduit shall be arranged in a manner toclear the openings of swinging overhead access doors as well as ceiling tiles.

F. Layout: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runsand locations of conduit and equipment, and not necessarily showing all requiredoffsets, details and accessories and equipment to be connected. All work shall beaccurately laid out with other Trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain a neat andworkmanlike installation which will afford maximum accessibility for operation,maintenance and headroom.

G. Contract Conflicts: Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what Tradeprovides items such as enclosures, racks, raceways, boards, connecting hardware,door hardware, supports, etc. such conflicts shall be coordinated between the divisionsinvolved. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all work shall be providedcomplete as one bid price.


H. Drawing Conflicts: Where drawing details, plans or specification requirements are inconflict and where sizes of the same item run are shown to be different within thecontract documents, the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contract.Systems and equipment called for in the specification or as shown on the drawingsshall be provided under the Contract of each trade as if it was required by both thedrawings and specifications. Prior to ordering or installation of any portion of workwhich appears to be in conflict, such work shall be brought to Architect's attention fordirection as to what is to be provided.

1.10 QUALITY

A. General: The Contractor is expected to base his bid on materials and equipmentcomplying fully with the drawings and specification. In the event he bases his bid onmaterials or equipment which do not conform, he shall be responsible for providingmaterials and equipment which fully conform at no change in his contract price. In anycase, where a specific specification for any item that is required is not shown, theContractor shall provide only the best quality equipment or material consistent with thequality of other specified equipment and material. The items of equipment shall beprovided in the quantity as shown by the drawings or in the quantity as specifiedherein.

B. General: The use of acceptable equipment does not relieve the Contractor ofresponsibility for the alternate equipment. The Contractor, at no cost to the Owner,shall remove and replace with the specified equipment any equipment or system thatshows evidence of improper operation, function, or size.

C. Responsibility: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply a working overallsystem. All equipment and material as well as labor must be provided whether or notspecifically mentioned in the specification or shown by the drawings.

1.11 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The contractor selected for each Div 17 system must be certified by the manufacturerof the products, adhere to the engineering, installation and testing procedures andutilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels inprovisioning the Project.

B. Contractor, as a minimum, must carry a current State issued limited energy license.

C. Additional requirements as indicated on each individual specifications section.


PART 2-PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS ALTERNATES AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturer,materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents.

B. Prototype or design selection: A product or group of products from an identifiedmanufacturer that was used as the basis of systems layouts and installation details.Prototype products are those scheduled on the drawings or in the specifications, orthose which are referenced in the contract documents as being prototypes, basis ofdesign or design selection.

C. Alternates: Specified products or manufacturers that will be in compliance with theperformance and quality provisions of the specifications and may be proposed for useby the contractor. Alternates will also be a different model number from those identifiedon the documents. Acceptable alternates are as listed on the documents. Alternatesmust be justified on the basis of need, cost or both as long as there is no identifiedreduction in quality and that all design parameters are met.

D. Substitutions: Products of unnamed manufacturers. Substitutions will not beacceptable.

E. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturers are listed asacceptable alternates each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on thedesign selection. Where a manufacturer's model number is listed, this model shall setthe standard of quality and performance required. Where no brand name is specified,the source and quality shall be subject to Engineer's review and acceptance. Wherethree or more manufacturers are listed, one of the listed manufacturers shall besubmitted for acceptance.

F. Contractor’s proposed alternates: All equipment components must meet or exceedthose specified. Should a Contractor wish to submit an alternate product or a productset stated in the construction documents as 'acceptable', it shall be the responsibility ofthe Contractor to provide an item-for-item CROSS REFERENCE for all specifiedproducts. Furthermore, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all relatedspecifications and product data sheets, for the proposed alternate equipmentcomponents. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a written statementconfirming that the proposed alternate product or product set meets or exceeds thebase level of performance and warranty as established within the Contract Documents.If the alternate product or product set is accepted by the Engineer, then all deviationsfrom the basis of design must then be indicated in writing and the manufacturer'sspecifications and/or catalog information must be submitted to the Engineer. If amanufacturer has discontinued any listed items, the Owner shall reserve the right toaccept or reject the current replacement product. The Owner shall be the finalauthority for approving acceptable, "equal" or alternate equipment components, andreserves the right to reject proposed substitutions without cause.


G. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade associationor government standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide acertificate that the product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request ofEngineer, Contractor shall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.

H. The contract documents are based on prototypical design where identified vendorsand products are used to prepare the system layout and to identify all utilityconnections. These drawings, even when dimensioned, are schematic in nature andare subject to field coordination to reflect actual conditions, final equipment shopdrawings—which may vary from the document which were furnished at the time ofdesign—and the contractor’s means and methods as well as coordination betweentrades.

I. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the final installation of allequipment and systems. Where alternate manufacturers are incorporated into thework, any architectural or engineering design required to incorporate that work shall bethe responsibility of the contractor, as is any cost resulting from changes in layout,increased sizes or lengths of run of services or for any additional utilities that mayberequired by the use of alternates.

J. Any changes in the project required to support alternates shall be fully identified andsubmitted as an adjunct to the shop drawing for the alternate product. In addition, suchchanges shall be reflected in the coordination drawings and shall be approved by allaffected trades.

K. Space Requirements: Alternate equipment where permitted and accepted, mustconform to established space requirements within the project. Accepted alternateequipment, which does not meet space requirements, shall be replaced at noadditional expense to the Contract. All modifications of related systems as a result ofalternates shall be made at no additional expense to the Contract. Submit allmodifications to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance.

2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: Shop drawings shall be submitted for equipment and material as listed in theindividual sections. One copy shall be submitted to the engineer prior to orderingequipment.

B. Responsibility: It is the Contractors responsibility to provide all material in accordancewith the plans and specifications. Material not provided in accordance with the plansand specifications will be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. Theresponsibility that all dimensions are confirmed and correlated with proper coordinationof all other trades shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. Theresponsibility and the necessity of providing materials and workmanship required bythe Specifications and Drawings which may not be indicated on the shop drawingsshall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible forany delays in job progress occurring directly or indirectly from late submissions orresubmissions of shop drawings, product data, or samples.


C. Official Record: The shop drawing submittal shall become the official record of thematerials to be installed. If materials are installed which do not correspond to therecord submittal they shall be removed from the project without any additional cost tothe Owner or delays in construction completion.

D. Information: The shop drawing record submittal shall include the following informationto the extent applicable to the particular item:

1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.2. Standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA, IEEE, ISA, NEMA, NFPA,

OSHA, UL, BICSI, EIA/TIA or other organizations, including the type, size, orother designation.

3. Dimensioned plan, sections, and elevations showing means for mounting,conduit connections, and grounding, and showing layout of components.

4. Materials and finish specifications, including paints.5. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.6. Internal wiring diagram indicating all connections to components and the

terminals for external connections.7. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, operation, and

maintenance.8. Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts.

E. Preparation: Prior to submittal, all shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy andcontract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall beaccompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined forconformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list alldiscrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checkedand noted shall be returned to Contractor un-reviewed.

F. Basis of Review: The Engineer's review shall be for compliance with the Specificationsand Drawings.

G. Ordering Equipment: No material shall be ordered or shop work started until theEngineer's has officially received the shop drawings record submittal and has formallyreleased the Contractor for submittal requirements.

H. Contractor's Review: Review the submittal before submitting to the Engineer. Norequest for payment shall be considered until the submittal has been reviewed,stamped and submitted for review.

I. Drawings: Drawings to include identification of project and names of Architect-Engineer, Engineer, Contractors, and/or supplier, data, number sequentially andindicate in general;

1. Fabrication and Erection dimensions2. Arrangements and sectional views3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections with

other work4. Kinds of materials and finishes5. Descriptive names of equipment


6. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the contract7. Leave blank area, size approximately 4 by 2-1/2 inches, near title block (for

Engineer's stamp imprint).8. In order to facilitate review of shop drawings, they shall be noted, indicating by

cross reference the contract drawings, notes, and specification paragraphnumbers where items occur in the contract documents.

9. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements.

2.3 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Each item of equipment or material shall be manufactured by a companyregularly engaged in the manufacturer of the type and size of equipment, shall besuitable for the environment in which it is to be installed, shall be approved for itspurpose, environment, and application, and shall bear the UL label.

B. Installation Requirements: Each item of equipment or material shall be installed inaccordance with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, however, themethods shall not be less stringent than specified herein.

C. Required Accessories: Provide all devices and materials, such as expansion bolts,foundation bolts, screws, channels, angles, and other attaching means, required tofasten enclosures, conduits, and other communication equipment and materials to bemounted on structures which are existing or new.

D. Protection: Division 17 Systems equipment shall, at all times, during construction beadequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by the elements.Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If apparatus has been damaged,such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost or time extension to the Contract.If apparatus has been subject to possible injury, it shall be thoroughly cleaned, driedout and put through tests as directed by the Manufacturer and Engineer, or shall bereplaced, if directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Contract.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. General: All Division 17 Systems items shall be identified as specified in the ContractDocuments. Such identification shall be in addition to the manufacturer's nameplatesand shall serve to identify the item's function and the equipment or system which itserves or controls. Refer to Identification Section of the specifications for additionalinformation.

2.5 SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. General: Surface mounted fixtures, outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. shall have a factoryapplied finish or shall be painted as accepted by Engineer. All conduits and fittings,where allowed to be installed surface mounted, shall be painted to match the finish onwhich it was installed. Paint shall be in accordance with other applicable sections ofthese specifications. Refer to additional specifications note herein, regarding conduit,boxes, etc.


2.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Core Drilling: The Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling as required forwork under this section, but in no case shall the Contractor cut into or weld onto anystructural element of the project without the written approval of the Architect.

B. Cutting and Patching: All cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be providedas specified in the contract documents. All cutting and patching shall be performed ina neat and workmanlike manner.

C. Openings and Sleeves: Locate all openings required for work performed under thissection. Provide sleeves, guards or other accepted methods to allow passage of itemsinstalled under this section.

D. Roof Penetration: Provide roofer with all pitch pans, fittings, etc., required for Division17 Systems items which penetrate the roof. Roof penetrations are to be waterproofedin such a manner that roofing guarantees are fully in force.

2.7 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS

A. Sleeves: Provide all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc.Locate all necessary slots for communication work and form before concrete is poured.Water-tight sleeves shall be line seal type WS. Fire rated partition sleeves shall bemild steel. Size shall be one standard diameter larger than pipe being installed or of alarger diameter to allow 1/4" minimum clearance.

B. Sleeves penetrating rated walls or floors shall require the contractor to provide a ULlisted penetration assembly meeting the hourly rating of the penetrated wall or floor.Contractor shall submit UL assembly for approval by the Engineer on all suchpenetrations.

C. Forms: Provide boxed out forms for conduit penetrations only where allowed by theArchitect. Fill opening after conduit installation, with equivalent material.

2.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Representative of the Owner, to the completesatisfaction of the Architect and Engineer, in the proper operation of all systems andequipment provided. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, via the Architect, asto whom the instructions are to be given in the operation of the systems and the periodof time in which they are to be given. The Architect shall be completely satisfied thatthe Representative of the Owner has been thoroughly and completely instructed in theproper operation of all systems and equipment before final payment is made. If theEngineer determines that complete and thorough instructions have not been given bythe Contractor to the Owner's Representative, then the Contractor shall be directed bythe Engineer to provide whatever instructions are necessary until the intent of thisparagraph of the Specification has been complied with.


B. Submittals: Submit to the Architect for approval five (5) typed sets, bound neatly inloose-leaf binders, of all instructions for the installation, operation, care andmaintenance of all equipment and systems, including instructions for the ordering andstocking of spare parts for all equipment installed under this contract. The lists shallinclude part number and suggested suppliers. Each set shall also include an itemizedlist of component parts that should be kept on hand and where such parts can bepurchased.

C. Information Requirements: Information shall indicate possible problems withequipment and suggested corrective action. The manuals shall be indexed for eachtype of equipment. Each section shall be clearly divided from the other sections. A subindex for each section shall also be provided.

D. Instructions: The instructions shall contain information deemed necessary by theEngineer and include but not limited to the following:

1. Introduction:a. Explanation of Manual and its useb. Purpose of systems

2. System:a. Detailed description of all systemsb. Illustrations, schematics, block diagrams, catalog cuts and other exhibits.

3. Operations:a. Complete detailed, step by step, sequential description of all phases of

operation for all portions of the systems, including start up, shutdown andbalancing. Include all posted instruction charts.

4. Maintenance:a. Parts list and part numbersb. Maintenance and replacement charts and the Manufacturer's

recommendations for preventive maintenance.c. Trouble shooting charts for systems and components.d. Instructions for testing each type of parte. Recommended list of on-hand spare partsf. Complete calibration instructions for all parts and entire systems.g. General and miscellaneous maintenance notes.

5. Manufacturer's Literature:a. Complete listing for all parts.b. Names, addresses and telephone numbersc. Care and operationd. All pertinent brochures, illustrations, drawings, cuts, bulletins, technical

data, certified performance charts and other literature with the modelactually furnished to be clearly and conspicuously identified.

e. Internal wiring diagrams and Engineering data sheets for all items and/orequipment furnished under each Contract.

f. Guarantee and warranty data.


PART 3-EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be performed in a neat,workmanlike and timely manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeableof the requirements of the Contract Documents. They shall be skilled in the methodsand craftsmanship needed to produce a quality level of workmanship. Personnel whoinstall materials and equipment shall be qualified by training and experience to performtheir assigned tasks.

B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first-qualityappearance and function, conforming to applicable standards of building systemconstruction, and exhibiting a high degree of quality and proficiency which is judged bythe Architect as equivalent or better than that ordinarily produced by qualified industrytradesmen.

C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation ofmaterial and equipment who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be carelessor unqualified to perform the assigned tasks. Material and equipment installations notin compliance with the Contract Documents, or installed with substandardworkmanship and not acceptable to the Architect, shall be removed and reinstalled byqualified craftsmen, at no change in the contract price.

3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP

A. Protection and Restoration: Suitably protect all equipment provided under this Divisionduring construction. Restore all damaged surfaces and items to "like new" conditionbefore a request for substantial completion inspection.

B. Handling: All materials shall be properly protected and all conduit openings shall betemporarily closed by the Contractor to prevent obstruction and damage. Post noticeprohibiting the use of all systems provided under this Contract, prior to completion ofwork and acceptance of all systems by the Owner's representative. The Contractorshall take precautions to protect his materials from damage and theft.

C. Safeguards: The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper safety guards forthe prevention of accidents that might be caused by the workmanship, materials,equipment or systems provided under this contract.

D. Cleanup: Keep the job site free from all debris and rubbish. Remove all debris andrubbish from the site and leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis.

3.3 SYSTEMS GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. General: As dictated on each particular Div 17 system specification. The guaranteeshall be by the Contractor to the Owner for any defective workmanship or material,which has been provided under this Contract at no cost to the Owner. Explain theprovisions of guarantee and warranty to the Owner at the "Demonstration ofCompleted System".


3.4 ENGINEERS FINAL OBSERVATION

A. Scheduling: Before requesting a final inspection, all systems shall be inspected by theequipment manufacturer's representative. When the system and all equipment is inplace and is operating properly, the manufacturer's representative shall complete thecheck-out memo and have all equipment ready for final inspection. Final as-builtdrawings and brochures shall be provided to the Engineer one week prior to finalinspection.

3.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION

A. As dictated on each individual specifications section.

END OF SECTION


CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED DEMONSTRATION MEMO

Note to Contractor: Do not submit this form at the time Technical Information Brochure issubmitted. Submit five copies of information listed below for checking at least one week beforescheduled completion of the building. After information has been accepted and inserted in eachbrochure, give the Owner a Demonstration of the Completed Div 17 System and have theOwner sign five copies of this form. Provide one signed copy for each brochure. After this hasbeen done, a written request for a final inspection of the System shall be made.

Re: ________________________________________________________________________ (Name of Project) _________________________________________________________________________ (Division Number and Name)

This memo is for the information of all concerned that the Owner has been given aDemonstration of the Completed Div 17 System on the work covered under this Division. Thisconference consisted of the system operation, a tour on which all major items of equipmentwere pointed out, and the following items were given to the Owner;

(a) Owner's copy of Technical Information Brochure containing approved submittal sheets on allitems, including the following; (To be inserted in the Technical Information Brochure after thecorrect tab).

(1) Maintenance Information published by manufacturer on equipment items.(2) Printed Warranties by manufacturers on equipment items.(3) Performance verification information as recorded by the Contractor.(4) Check-out Memo on equipment by manufacturer's representative.(5) Written operating instructions on any specialized items.(6) Explanation of the one-year guarantee on the system.

(b) "As-Built" conditions as described in the record drawing specifications.(c) A demonstration of the System in Operation and of the maintenance procedures which shall

be required.

_________________________________________________________________________(Name of General Contractor)

By: _________________________________________________________________________(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)

_________________________________________________________________________(Name of SubContractor)

By: _________________________________________________________________________(Authorized Signature, Title & Date)

Brochure, Instruction, Prints, Demonstration & Instruction in Operation Received:__________________________________________________________(Name of Owner)

By: _____________________________________________________(Authorized Signature, Title, Date)

cc: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Sub Contractor and General Contractor(List names as stated in cc: above)

PATHWAYS AND SPACES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM17110-1

SECTION 17110

PATHWAYS AND SPACES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of thissection.

Section 16110 - Raceway Systems, apply to work of this Section. Specifications describedherein take precedence over Section 16110.

B. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additionalrequirements, which are supplemented by this section.

SECTION TITLE17010 TECHNOLOGY GENERAL PROVISIONS16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES17120 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM17450 BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS17779 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEMS17783 BROADBAND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

C. STANDARDS

ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathwaysand Spaces”.ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard”.ANSI/NECA/ BICSI 568-2001 “Installing Commercial building TelecommunicationsCabling”ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 “Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure ofCommercial Buildings”.ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 “Commercial Building Bonding and Grounding Requirements forTelecommunications”ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, CSA C22.1.BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual ( TCIM)County Codes and Regulations.Underwriters Laboratories (UL)FCC -Federal Communications CommissionADA RequirementsOccupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA)National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)Florida Statutes and Administrative Rules


Cabling System Certified Manufacturers Catalog

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Furnish and install complete with all accessories an EIA/TIA 569 Pathways andSpaces infrastructure for supporting of Structured Cabling System (SCS) and housing ofvoice/data equipment. The goal of the project is to provide a reliable architecture of thebuilding that shall serve as a support for transport of data and voice telephony Cablingthroughout the building from designated demarcation points to places located at variouswall, floor, ceiling, column, room and other locations as indicated on the contract drawingsand described herein. Support copper and fiber optic cabling. The cabling that shall besupported includes, but is not limited to:

Copper - UTP 4PR CAT 6 plenum or Non-plenum, Multipair CAT (3,5) plenum and Non-plenum, Multipair telephone general purpose plenum and Non-plenum, RJ45 Patch Panels,110 Punch down blocks, 66 Punch down blocks, Wire management devices.

Fiber Optic - Air blown fiber cables, conventional fiber optic cables. fiber distribution andtermination cabinets.

Other: Hybrid Cables, Composite cables, Floor Racks and cabinets, Wall mounted racksand cabinets.

The equipment that shall be housed includes, but are not limited to:

Voice Telephony - PBX

Data - Hub, Switch, Router, Modem, Repeater, Transceiver, DSU/CSU

Other: Multiplexer, Multipurpose switch, UPS

B. General: For pathways the system shall utilize a combination of PVC Conduit, metallicconduit, Metallic tray for vertical and horizontal cabling support. Pathways shall be providedand located as shown and in the quantities indicated on the drawings. Pathways shallterminate in rooms or closets using approved fasteners and termination hardware andbushings and shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges. All Pathways shall be identified atall locations.

C. All installers should anticipate that all products and installation procedures shall complywith the ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2001 requirements at a minimum.

D. General: Provide all supports, hangers and inserts required to mount conduit, pull boxesand other equipment provided under this Division.


E. Support: All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building. Supportsand hangers shall be of a type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. Wire shall not beused as a support. Boxes and conduit shall not be supported or fastened to ceilingsuspension wires or to ceiling channels. Do not install any devices supported by ceilingtiles.

F. Installation: The Contractor shall layout and provide his work in advance of the laying offloors or walls, and shall provide all sleeves that may be required for openings throughfloors, walls, etc. Where plans call for conduit to be run exposed, provide all inserts andclamps for the supporting of conduit.

G. Pull Strings: Provide pull strings in all raceways. Pull strings shall be nylon and shall beimpervious to moisture. Pull strings installed in one inch and smaller conduits shall have atensile strength of not less than 30 lbs. Pull strings installed in conduits larger than 1 inchshall have a tensile strength not less than 200 lbs.

H. Work Included: Placement and terminations between these designated demarcation pointsand locations designated on the plans shall be considered part of the contract.

1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. General: The contractor selected for the Project must be BICSI installer certified andcertified by the manufacturer for the products, adhere to the engineering, installation andtesting procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distributionchannels in provisioning the Project.

B. General: The Contractor directly responsible for this work shall be a " Pathways andSpaces for Structured Cabling System Contractor (PS-SCS) " who is, and who has been,regularly engaged in the providing and installation of commercial and industrial pathwaysand spaces for telecommunications wiring systems of this type and size for at least theimmediate past five years. Any sub-contractor who will assist the PS-SCS contractor inperformance of this work, shall have the same training and certification as the PS-SCScontractor.

C. Certification: The contractor's Project Manager shall possess a current BICSI RegisteredCommunications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certificate. All shop drawings submitted bythe contractor shall bear the RCDD's seal.

D. Experience: The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall berequired to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. TheContractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successfulinstallation and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools andequipment.

1.4 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING

A. General: Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shallbe governed by provisions of this specification.

PART 2: PRODUCTS


A. As indicated on Section 16110 - Raceway Systems PART2: PRODUCTS.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUITS

A. PVC conduits shall utilize long radius sweeps at all 90 degree transitions. For Coppercables minimum 10 times the internal conduit diameter. For Fiber Optics cables minimum20 times the internal conduit diameter. Field bending of PVC is allowed as long as the bendradius of the intended cable type is not exceeded.

B. No section of conduit shall be longer than 100 ft or contain more than two 90 degree bendsbetween pull points or pull boxes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION OF BOXES

A. Tags: During installation of pull strings all pull strings shall be marked with vinyl tagsindicating where the opposite end may be found.

3.3 BLANK PLATES

A. Plates: Unless otherwise noted all outlet boxes shall receive blank plates matching thefinish of plates on electrical devices in the same room.

3.4 AVOIDING EMI

A. To avoid EMI for Telecommunications cabling and/or conduit containing cabling, allraceways shall provide clearances of at least 4 feet (1.2 meters) from motors ortransformers; 1 foot (0.3 meter) from conduit and cables used for electrical-powerdistribution; and 5 inches (12 centimeters) from fluorescent lighting. Raceways shall crossperpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical-power cables and conduits. TheContractor shall not place any raceway alongside power lines.

END OF SECTION

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM17120 - 1

SECTION 17120

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of thissection.

B. General: Telecommunications Drawings apply to work of this section. The overall anddetailed SCS design shown on the drawings, selected materials, device locations,installation details, mounting details, cabling routing and supporting and all technicalspecifications if provided on the drawings apply to work of this section.

C. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additionalrequirements, which are supplemented by this section.

SECTION TITLE17010 TECHNOLOGY GENERAL PROVISIONS17110 PATHWAYS AND SPACES FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS17450 BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS17779 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEMS

D. General: Installation practices for Structure Cabling System as describe herein takeprecedence over any other section in the construction documents set.

E. General: Comply with the document “Marion County Network Cabling Standards” preparedby Marion County, Florida, prepared by Marion County Information Systems (MC15).

F. STANDARDS

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and addenda”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: GeneralRequirements”, CSA T529.

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and addenda”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: BalancedTwisted-Pair”

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1: “Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100ohm Category 6 Cabling”

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 A and Addenda “Commercial Building Standard forTelecommunications Pathways and Spaces”, CSA T530.

5. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2001 “ Installing Commercial Building TelecommunicationsCabling”

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 A “Administration Standard for TelecommunicationsInfrastructure of Commercial Buildings”, CSA T528.

7. J-STD-607-A “Commercial Building Grounding (Earthting) and BondingRequirements for Telecommunications”.


8. IEC/TR3 61000-5-2 - Ed. 1.0 and amendments. “Electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) - Part 5: Installation and mitigation guidelines - Section 2: Earthing andcabling”

9. ISO/IEC 11801:2000 Ed 1.2 and amendments. ” Information technology - Genericcabling for customer premises”

10. CENELEC EN 50173:2000 and amendments. ” Information Technology - GenericCabling Systems”

11. ANSI/NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code”, CSA C22.1.12. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)13. BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM)14. County Codes and Regulations.15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)16. FCC -Federal Communications Commission17. ADA Requirements18. Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA)19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)20. Florida Statutes and Administrative Rules21. Manufacturers Product Cabling Catalogs22. Manufacturers Training Manuals (Design and Installation).

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Furnish, install, test and certify complete with all accessories an ANSI/TIA/EIA568B.1 Category 6 Structured Cabling System (SCS) with a minimum 25 year performancewarranty for the entire system from the manufacturers and a minimum of 3 years warrantyfor materials and labor from the cabling contractor. The goal of the project is to provide anenhanced SCS that shall serve as a vehicle for the transport of voice telephony, data,audio, video, security and low voltage devices for building controls and management,throughout the building and from building to building from designated demarcation points tooutlets located at various desk, workstation and other locations as indicated and ifindicated on the contract drawings and described herein.

B. Support analog and digital signal applications on a common cabling platform. Theapplications that shall be supported include, but are not limited to:


Data Processing - EIA-232-D, EIA-422A, EIA-423-A, RS-485, Ethernet 10BASE-T (IEEE802.3i), 10BASE-F (IEEE 802.3j), 100 BASE-T (IEEE 802.3u), 1000BASE-T (IEEE802.3ab), Gigabit ATM, and 1000BASE-TX (ANSI/TIA/EIA-854)

Voice Applications - Lucent, Northern Telecom, NEC, SIEMENS.

Video – Broadband and base band Analog Video, Digital Video, Video Conferencing

Other Applications: ISDN, ATM, ADSL, VoIP.

C. Labeling: All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations according to theTIA/EIA 606, labeling and numbering as shown on the drawings or as provided by theowner. All cables shall be terminated in an alpha-numeric sequence at all terminationlocations.

D. It is the contractor’s responsibility to stay under the 90 meter (295 ft) length limitation forHorizontal Cabling with the exception of UTP cables to outlets for Wireless Access Pointsfor which the distance limitation is 80 meters (262 FT). All cabling shall run in cable tray aslong as possible while keeping the cable runs as short as possible. All Horizontal cableshall be placed without diagonal runs. (i.e. parallel to walls and ceiling grid) unlessotherwise specifically indicated on the drawings.

E. Warranty: SCS shall be required to be under manufacturers warranty program for acomplete channel configuration including cable, jacks, patch cords and patch panels andinclude cabling specifically approved for the channel configuration with the manufacturerscomponents. Manufactures shall provide the warranty worst-case performance data for theinstalled cabling system, and the performance data indicated in the warrantydocuments/certificate.

A twenty five (25) year warranty available for the category 6 structured cabling system shallbe provided for an end-to-end channel model installation which covers applicationsassurance, cable, connecting hardware and the labor cost for the repair or replacementthereof.Additional features of the warranty shall include:Compliance with Margin claimed by the manufacturers over category 6 channelspecifications on all transmission parameters across the entire frequency range of 1-250MHz as shown on the manufacturers catalogs and literature.

F. All terminations shall comply with, and be 100% tested to the ANSITIA/EIA 568B.2.1Category 6 requirements at a minimum. It should be anticipated by all installers that allhorizontal cable supporting data applications must meet at a minimum the Category 6performance requirements for 100 meters as listed by the TIA standards for the channel.

G. Patch Cords: The patch cords shall be 100% factory tested for compliance to the Category6 standard.

H. The installed SCS shall meet or exceed the performance specifications as listed by theselected manufacturers shown on the drawings and the performance specifications aslisted herein. The Contractor shall follow the Manufacturer’s recommended installationprocedures.


I. Data Services: Wiring utilized for data communications shall originate at Owner providedswitches, hubs and concentrators in vertical free standing equipment racks, and/orenclosed wall mounted vertical equipment racks located at individual TelecommunicationsRooms (TR’S).

J. Work Included: Wiring, terminations and patch cords between these designateddemarcation points and outlet locations designated on the plans shall be considered part ofthe contract. Outlets (jacks) shall be furnished, wired and installed by the SCS contractor.

K. Work Included: Contractor shall provide and install all connecting hardware andaccessories required for termination of all copper pairs in the project.

L. Work included: Installation, Termination and identification of wiring between stationoutlets, Telecommunications Rooms (TR's) and the Equipment Room (ER), includingowner directed cross connects for voice and patching for data, shall be considered part ofthe contractors work.

1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. General: The contractor selected for the Project must be certified by the manufacturers ofthe products, adhere to the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize theauthorized manufacturers components and distribution channels in provisioning theProject.

B. General: The Contractor directly responsible for this work shall be a "Structured CablingSystem Contractor" who is, and who has been, regularly engaged in the providing andinstallation of commercial and industrial telecommunications wiring systems of this typeand size for at least the immediate past five years. Any sub-Contractor who will assist theSCS contractor in performance of this work, shall have the same training and certificationas the SCS contractor.

C. Certification: The contractor's Project Manager shall possess a current BICSI RegisteredCommunications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certificate. All shop drawings submitted bythe contractor shall bear the RCDD's stamp.

D. The Contractor shall have a (BICSI) RCDD on Staff. Contract RCDD’s shall not beacceptable.

E. The Installer team leader assigned for the project shall be BICSI registered Level II installeror proven and qualified equal.


F. Experience: The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall berequired to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. TheContractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successfulinstallation and testing of Category 5E and Category 6 metallic premise distributionsystems and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools andequipment. The Owner or engineer may elect to request submittal of additional financial,operational and administrative information of the contractor to demonstrate the requiredexperience.

G. The Contractor shall possess a State of Florida Low Voltage License.

H. The Contractor shall maintain a permanent office within 150 miles of the project site.

I. The SCS contractor shall take full responsibility for the complete system, including thesupervision of the installation of SCS conduit and cable tray provided by the electricalcontractor. The SCS contractor shall make all wire terminations and install all devices.

J. A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the contractor’s bid indicating thefollowing:

1. A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact namesand telephone numbers for each.

2. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the integrity of the installeddistributive information local area network system.

3. A technical resume of experience for the contractor’s engineer/RCDD and on-siteforeman who will be assigned to the project.

4. Similar documentation for any subcontractor who will assist in the performance ofthis work.

5. Location of office from which installation and warranty work will be performed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submittals shall include manufactures cut sheets for all proposed equipment. Cutsheets shall bear the printed logo or trademark of the manufacturer for each type ofproduct being provided. Mark each copy of the data sheets for the specific product beingprovided with an identifying mark, arrow, or highlighting. The followings items shall besubmitted:

1. All wire and cable.2. All connectors and required tooling.3. All termination system components for each cable type.4. All ER and TR’s equipment frame types and connecting hardware.5. All cable suspension j-hooks, cable fasteners, CAT6 cable suspension components.6. All grounding and surge suppression system components for the systems portion of

the project.

B. AutoCAD Installation/layout drawings shall be provided for the entire SCS, including but notlimited to ER and TR’s rooms layouts and elevations of racks, Backbone routes and outletassemblies, showing Components model numbers, complete part quantities & numbers,configurations, and the interrelationship and position of all components. Drawings shall bea minimum of 24” X 36” in size.

1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE ROUTING AND INSTALLATION


A. General: Cable routing and Installation practices shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA,BICSI’s Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), Customer-OwnedOutside Plant Manual (CO-OSP) and BICSI’s Telecommunications Cabling InstallationManual (TCIM).

B. Plenum Spaces and cable routing: The majority of the wiring in this building will be installedabove ceilings. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply withthe requirements as outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC) article 800. All cablingshall bare the CMR, MPR OR OFNR (RISER) and or appropriate markings for ducted "airreturn" applications and for cable run in conduit above grade. Cable shall bare CMP, MPPor OFNP (plenum) markings for all non-ducted return air applications or as required by localand/or State code requirements. Cable shall be outdoor type for cable run in conduit belowgrade. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify with local and State codeenforcement officers where plenum and non-plenum cables are required. All cable shallbare the appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed.

C. Cable bundles: In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas if duct, cable trays or conduitsare not shown on the contract drawings, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 40 orless, horizontal wiring with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cableties shall be Velcro type. The cable bundling shall be supported via "HILTI ECH/X-ECH”Cable fasteners in TR’s and non-plenum areas and Category 6 compliant J-hooks in ceilingspaces. Conventional Bridal rings shall not be allowed for cable support. The contractorshall adhere to the manufacturers' requirements for bending radius and pulling tension ofall cables.

D. J-hooks: Where J-hooks are required by the drawings and from cable tray to outlets,provide a minimum of two hangers at any corners or 90 degree turns. Attachment shall beto the building structure and framework randomly supported at 3, 4 or maximum of five (5)foot intervals. Ceiling suspension wire or independent tie wire shall not be allowed in anyspace for cable support. Where cable is run above the ceiling in areas without walls, allthread rod shall be used (minimum 1/4", however sized to support the intended weight)with the appropriate CAT 6 hanger for cross-room support. Support rods shall be level andplumb after cable installation. The J-hooks shall feature a wide base loop with smoothcurves to eliminate snag potential and cable deformation. Listings: J-hooks shall be inaccordance with NEC, ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 requirements for structured cablingsystems. All cable supports shall be U.L. listed.

E. HILTI ECH/X-ECH fasteners: Horizontal cables shall be suspended by "HILTI ECH/X-ECH"fasteners in TR’s on the plywood area where ladder tray or rack management is notavailable per the design documents. Listings: "HILTI ECH/X-ECH" fasteners shall be inaccordance with NEC, ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 requirements for structured cablingsystems. Above the plywood area J-hooks or D-rings are also approved.


F. Velcro Tywraps: Horizontal cables shall be fastened by Velcro tywraps from cable tray tooutlets in addition to the J-hooks or other approved supports. Plenum rated Velcro tywrapsshall be used in plenum environments. Non CAT6 compliant tie-wraps are not acceptable.It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify with local and State codeenforcement officers where plenum and non-plenum Velcro tywraps are required andwhether or not the specified plenum rated tywraps are acceptable. All cable tywraps usedfor SCS cabling shall bare the appropriate markings for the environment in which they areinstalled.

G. Protection: Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls,existing or created by this contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility ofthe contractor. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished insuch a manner, which is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities havingjurisdiction over this work. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passagebetween locations as shown on the drawings shall be the responsibility of this contractor'swork. Any openings created by or for this contractor and left unused shall also be sealedas part of this work. Penetration rating shall equal structure rating.

H. Damage: The contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or workdisrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting and ceiling tilereplacement shall be included as part of this contract.

I. Avoiding EMI: To avoid EMI, all pathways shall provide clearances of at least 4 feet (1.2meters) from motors or transformers; 1 foot (0.3 meter) from conduit and cables used forelectrical-power distribution; and 5 inches (12 centimeters) from fluorescent lighting.Pathways shall cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical-power cables andconduits. The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, orshare the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus

1.6 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDING

A. General: Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shallbe governed by the provisions of this specification.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS AND ALTERNATES

A. Specified Method: Where several brand names, makes or manufacturers are listed asacceptable alternate, each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the designselection but each must meet all specification requirements. Where a manufacturer'smodel number is listed, this model shall set the standard of quality and performancerequired. Where no brand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject toEngineer's review and acceptance. Where manufacturers are listed, one of the listedmanufacturers shall be submitted for acceptance. No substitutions are permitted.

B. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association orgovernment standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate thatthe product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer, Contractorshall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.

C. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturer's,materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents.


1.8 DEMOLITION

A. General: During the execution of the work, all required relocation, rerouting, etc., ofexisting cabling, equipment and systems in the existing building areas where the work isrequired, shall be performed by the Contractor, as indicated on the drawings, or as requiredby job conditions and as determined by the Architect in the field, to facilitate the installationof the new systems. The Owner shall require continuous operation of the existing systems,while demolition, relocation work or new tie-ins are performed.

B. Coordination: Prior to any deactivation and relocation or demolition work, arrange aconference with the Architect and the Owner's representative in the field to inspect each ofthe items to be deactivated, removed or relocated. Care shall be taken to protect allequipment designated to be relocated and reused or to remain in operation and beintegrated with the new systems.

C. Provisions: All deactivation, relocation, and temporary tie-ins shall be provided by theContractor. All demolition, removal and the legal disposal of demolished materials ofsystem designated to be demolished shall be provided by the Contractor.

D. All Existing Voice/Data cables and connecting hardware not to be used after the newinstallation is complete and within the areas where work is required as part of this projectshall be removed by the SCS contractor. All existing cables to be left for future use ifindicated by the owner shall be tagged for that purpose.

E. Owners Salvage: The Owner reserves the right to inspect the material scheduled forremoval and salvage any items he deems usable as spare parts.

F. Phasing: The Contractor shall perform all work in phases as directed by the Architect tosuit the project progress schedule, as well as the completion date of the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLETS

A. General: Communications outlets that contain copper services shall be equipped with 8-position modular jacks (RJ45 type) utilizing T568A wiring, “BNC” type bulkhead videoconnections and “RCA” type audio connections to be provided where and if indicated. Alloutlet cabling shall terminate on appropriate termination blocks at their associated TR.Outlet jack module arrangement and quantities are shown on the drawings. Provide color-coded icon labels at each outlet and at all patch panels. Outlets shall be able toaccommodate up to 6 8-position modular jacks each.

B. Wall outlets: shall consist of single gang wall plates. Provide blank module inserts for allunused module locations

C. Floor outlets: where indicated on the drawings, shall consist of single gang wall platesinside the floor box. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations.


D. Modular furniture outlets: where indicated on the drawings, shall consist of modularfurniture faceplate capable of housing up to (4) 8-position modular connectors. Provideblank module inserts for all unused module locations.

E. Raceway outlets: where indicated on the drawings, shall consist of single gang platessuited for the selected raceway. Provide blank module inserts for all unused modulelocations.

F. House wall phone, if indicated, shall consist of SE630 type wall plates with Cat 6 cable toeach, terminating in 8-position modular jack.

G. 8-position modular jacks: CAT 6 jacks shall meet or exceed the following electrical andmechanical specifications:

Electrical Specifications:1. Insulation resistance: 500 M minimum.2. Dielectric withstand voltage 1,000 VAC RMS, 60 hz minimum, contact-to-contact and

1,500 VAC RMS, 60 hz minimum from any contact to exposed conductive surface.3. Contact resistance: 20 M maximum.4. Current rating: 1.5 A at 68 F (20 C) per IEC publication 512-3, Test 5b5. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer6. UL verified for EIA/TIA electrical performance7. Comply with FCC Part 68

Mechanical Performance:1. Plug Insertion Life: 750 insertions2. Contact Force: 3.5 oz (99.2 g) minimum using FCC-Approved modular plug.3. Plug Retention Force: 30 lb (133 N) minimum between modular plug and jack.4. Temperature Range: -40 to 150 F (-40 to 66 C)

H. Approved Manufacturers: SYSTIMAX

I. Outlet Labeling: Each jack on all outlets shall be identified with permanent machinegenerated labels, meeting the EIA/TIA 606 requirements, matching the numbering planindicated on the drawings with the addition of a letter suffix indicating the jack position onthe faceplate. Jacks shall be numbered from left to right and top to bottom (Ex: 123-1A,123-1B, etc.). Each module shall be labeled as to its current function (VOICE or DATA)using color coded icons. All labeling must be permanent. All labeling shall be a minimum12 pt. in size. All labeling systems shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior tofabrication.

J. Performance marking: Connecting hardware should be marked to designate transmissionperformance at the discretion of the manufacturer or the approval agency. The markings, ifany, shall be visible during installation. It is suggested that such markings consist of:

“Cat 6” for category 6 components

Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required bylisting agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building coderequirements.


V. Connecting Hardware Performance: All CAT 6 connecting hardware, E.G. RJ45 jacks,RJ45 ports in patch panels, shall be utilized in a channel configuration meeting orexceeding the following specifications at 250 Mhz:

1. NEXT (dB) at 250 MHz - 46.0 dB or exceed2. Insertion Loss (dB) at 250 MHz - 0.32 dB or less3. FEXT (dB) at 250 MHz - 35.1 dB or exceed4. Return Loss (dB) at 250 MHz – 16.0 dB or exceed

2.2 CATEGORY 6 DATA AND VOICE HORIZONTAL CABLE

A. General: Data pairs shall be extended between the outlet location and its associated TR.The cable shall consist of 4 pair 23 gauge, solid copper conductors, Certified to theCategory 6 standards. UL Verified for EIA/TIA electrical performance Comply with FCC Part68. Cables shall be terminated on each of the 8-position modular jacks provided at eachoutlet. Voice jacks shall also utilize this cable type. Only virgin materials shall be used.

Cable selection shall be based upon meeting an end to end channel performance forDATA drops and Permanent link performance for VOICE drops.


B. Jacket: Cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a plenum cable whererequired by code or by the Authority having jurisdiction for this project. All cables shall bearthe U.L. CMP marking. Cable pairs shall be insulated with FEP. Cables utilizing 2+2construction shall not be acceptable. Plenum-rated cables shall use 100% FEP for theinsulation except where it is proven that the cable constructed with alternate materialsmeets or exceeds the electrical performance of FEP. All cables shall bear the UL and CMRmarkings.

C. Horizontal Cables drops from TR to specified outlets locations are to be without splices.

D. Properties: Electrical Characteristics for CAT6 horizontal UTP cable tested on 100 m lengthshall meet or exceed the following specifications:

Frequency 10 MHZ 100 MHZ 200 Mhz 250 MhzInsertion Loss 6.0 19.8 29.0 32.8 DBNEXT 56.3 44.3 39.8 38.3 DBPSNEXT 57.3 42.3 37.8 36.3 DBELFEXT 47.8 27.8 21.8 19.8 DBPSELFEXT 44.8 24.8 18.8 16.8 DBReturn Loss 25.0 20.1 18.0 17.3 DBDelay 545 538 N/A 536 NSecDelay Skew 45 45 45 45 NSec

E. Performance marking: 100 UTP cabling runs should be marked to designate transmissionperformance at the discretion of the manufacturer or the approval agency at both endsafter installation. It is suggested that such markings consist of:

“Cat 6” for category 6 cable

Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required bylisting agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building coderequirements.

F. Approved Manufacturers: SYSTIMAX

2.3 CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANELS

A. General: Equipment racks shall be equipped with 19" rack mounted, 8-position modularjacks (RJ-45 type), non-keyed, patch panels for termination of all copper horizontal cables.

B. Work Area Outlets patch panels shall be fully loaded with jacks to meet the Category 6standard and shall be modular-to-110, wired for T568A pin outs for the cables serving theWork Area Outlets. Patch panels shall be provided in 24 or 48 port configurations asshown on the drawings. Punch down (4) pair per jack port.

C. Voice Backbone termination In ER. 110 wall mount wiring blocks shall be used fordistribution of the voice backbone pairs to the TR’s. Terminate the copper backbonecables, 25 pair, 50 Pair or 100 Pair as shown on the drawings, to these 110 wiring blocks.The contractor shall provide and install backboards and wiring blocks for the copperbackbone cable terminating in the ER. The layout is shown on the Drawings and shall be


coordinated with the engineer and the Owner. The contractor shall provide and installcomputer generated and printed color-coded labeling for each block.

D. Voice Backbone termination In TR’s. 110 rack mount wiring blocks shall be used fordistribution of the voice backbone pairs to the work area patch panels via (1) pair 110/RJ45patch cords. Terminate the copper backbone cables, 25 pair, 50 Pair or 100 Pair as shownon the drawings, to these 110 wiring blocks. The contractor shall provide and installbackboards-Brackets and wiring blocks for the copper backbone cable terminating in theTR’s. The layout is shown on the Drawings and shall be coordinated with the engineer andthe Owner. The contractor shall provide and install computer generated and printed color-coded labeling for each block.

E. Wireless Access Point termination: All Wireless Access Point (WAP) UTP cables shall beterminated in the Telecomm Room on separate patch panels, or on specially designatedlocations at the end of the patch panel.

F. Approved Manufacturers: SYSTIMAX

G. Identification: Designation strips for each port shall be provided on the patch panel. Allcables shall be terminated in numerical sequence and each position labeled as to outletnumber and jack position as is noted for the outlets.

H. Category 6 Modular Patch Cords and Work-area Cords:

1. Data Work Stations Cords: Provide one Category 6 Modular Work-area Cord for eachwall and floor outlet in the project plus 25% spares to be used at the WORK AREAlocations.

2. Data Patch Cords: Provide one Category 6 Modular Patch Cord for the rack patching,for each wall and floor outlet in the project plus 25% spares.

3. All Data cords for line items 1 and 2 above shall be round, and consist of 24 AWGcopper, stranded conductors insulated with high density polyethylene and jacketedwith flame retardant PVC. Cords shall be a component part of the proposed CAT 6channel solution and have been tested as such.

4. Data Wireless Access Points (WAP) Cords: Provide one Category 6 Modular Cord foreach WAP outlet in the project. WAP cords shall be provided with 8-position modularconnectors on both ends with CAT 6 solid-conductor cable for cords more than 3 mtsand up to 12 mts in length. For 3 m long cords or less provide Cat6 stranded cablecords. Actual cords length shall be in accordance with RF site survey made by theWAP electronics vendor. Provide one Category 6 Modular Patch Cord for the rackpatching, for each WAP in the project plus 25% spares. Patch cords shall beprovided in lengths as required by the patch panel arrangements with RJ-45 modularconnectors on both ends. Color selection desired is Red.


J. Voice patch cords:

1. Voice Patch Cords: Provide one 110-RJ45 Patch Cord, for the rack patching, foreach wall outlet in the project plus 25% spares. Patch cords shall be provided withRJ-45 modular connector on one end and 110 connector on the other end.

2.4 Category 6 Permanent Link and Channel systems.

A. Permanent Link (PL) and Channel (CH) Performance: All CAT 6 products shall be utilizedmeeting or exceeding the performance specifications at 10 Mhz, 100 Mhz, 200 Mhz and250 Mhz for the two link types: Channel for Data drops, Permanent Link for VOICE drops.

Channel specifications:

Frequency 10 MHZ 100 MHZ 200 Mhz 250 MhzInsertion Loss 6.3 21.3 31.5 35.6 DBNEXT 56.6 39.9 34.8 33.1 DBPSNEXT 54.0 37.1 31.9 30.2 DBELFEXT 43.3 23.3 17.2 15.3 DBPSELFEXT 40.3 20.3 14.2 12.3 DBReturn Loss 19.0 12.0 9.0 8.0 DBDelay 555 N/A N/A N/A NSecDelay Skew 50 N/A N/A N/A NSec

Permanent Link specifications:

Frequency 10 MHZ 100 MHZ 200 Mhz 250 MhzInsertion Loss 5.5 18.6 27.4 31.1 DBNEXT 57.8 41.8 36.9 35.3 DBPSNEXT 55.5 39.3 34.3 32.7 DBELFEXT 44.2 24.2 18.2 16.2 DBPSELFEXT 41.2 21.2 15.2 13.2 DBReturn Loss 21.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 DBDelay 498 N/A N/A N/A NSecDelay Skew 44 N/A N/A N/A NSec

2.5 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING

A. General: Copper backbone (Riser/tie) cabling shall be provided between TR’s and ER asdesignated on the contract drawings. All voice grade wire and cable place undergroundshall be solid twisted pair, multi-conductor, ASP-filled core cable, PE-89. Cable jacket shallbe aluminum steel polyethylene (ASP). Conductors shall be dual insulated with foam skinand plastic, and surrounded by filling compound. The cable shall be resistant to mechanicaldamage, lightning damage or damage from wildlife. Indoor cables above ground shall bearthe appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed and shall be CAT3cables.


B. Voice feed cable: Multipair cables shall provided and terminated from the wall mountedprotector panels to the voice backbone 110 wiring blocks for Voice distribution.

C. The multi-pair copper cables shall meet the following specifications:

1. Gauge: 24 AWG2. DC Resistance: 27.3 /1000 ft (8.96 /100m), maximum3. Mutual Capacitance (at 1khz)4. Impedance: 100 (25 pair)5. Buried/Underground Cable Attenuation (db/1,000 ft [305m]):

at 1.0 MHz: 6.4 (25 pair), maximum6. Aerial Cable Attenuation (db/1,000 ft [305m]):

at 1.0 MHz: 6.7 (25 pair), maximum

D. Approved Manufacturers: SYSTIMAX

E. Miscellaneous Cabling: Provide one Cat 6 cable, in conduit, from the demarc point in theER room to the junction box provided in each elevator control room.

2.6 SITE COPPER CABLE PROTECTION UNITS

A. General: All site copper circuits shall be provided with protection between each buildingwith an entrance cable protector chassis. All building-to-building circuits shall be routedthrough this protector. Protector shall be connected with a #6 AWG copper bondingconductor between the protector ground lug and the TR ground point.

B. Modules: Each protector chassis shall be provided with plug-in protector modules for eachpair terminated on the chassis.

C. Approved Manufacturers: CIRCA, PORTA SYSTEMS.

2.8 EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. General: Each TR and the ER shall be equipped with 19" EIA rack(s) (floor mounted) tohouse owner-provided equipment and contractor provided termination bays for the multiplecable types. Floor mounted racks shall be mounted on an isolation pad and utilize non-conductive washers to secure the rack to the floor. Floor mounted open racks shall besecured from the top rail to the backboard in the room with a length of cable runway toprevent movement. Wall racks shall be securely fastened to the wall studs with at least1/4" hardware. All racks shall be bonded to the TR ground bar using a standard ground lugand #6 jacketed green cable.

B. Rack Accessories: Each equipment rack shall be provided with the following accessories:


Horizontal cable organizer: 2RU wire Managers. n+1 per rack : n = number of copper patchpanel. Wire Managers shall start at the top of each rack.Provide (2) additional wire managers for each rack for active devices not shown.Vertical cable management with covers between 19” racks, and at the end of the 19” rack.Power plug strip: Leviton 5500-192.

C. Approved Manufacturers: SIEMON, CHATSWORTH, HOMACO, PANDUIT, ORTRONICS,HUBBELL

D. Plywood backboards shall be installed in each ER/TR rooms on walls mounted 6” A.F.F.Rooms shall have all walls covered except the areas adjacent to the door light switchspace, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Plywood shall be 8’ tall and minimum ¾”AC with the best side out. All imperfections shall be sealed and sanded prior to paintingwith 2 coats of fire-retardant paint. (Color to be Black, Grey or white) Coordinate colorselection with the Owner/Architect.

2.11 CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. Section 17110 “pathways and spaces for structured cabling system” applies to work of thissection. Section 16110 “Raceway Systems” applies to work of this section.

B. Velcro tywraps: Horizontal cables shall be fastened by Velcro tywraps from cable tray tooutlets in addition to the J-hooks or other approved supports. Fire retardant Velcro tywrapsshall be used in plenum environments.

C. Cable Runway: Cable runway for Telecommunications Rooms minimum 12” or as indicatedon the drawings. Cable Runway Radius Drop shall be provided to protect Horizontal cablewhen mounted/dropped to/from cable runway.

Approved Manufacturers: B-LINE, WIREMOLD, GS METALS, CHATSWORTH, HOMACO

2.12 UNSPECIFIED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

A. Any item of equipment or material not specifically addressed on the contract drawings or inthis document and required to provide a complete and functional SCS installation shall beprovided in a level of quality consistent with other specified items.

2.13 GROUNDING SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS

A. Section 17450 “Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications” applies to work of thissection.

B. Communications bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPAas well as EIA/TIA grounding and bonding standards. Backbone and entrance cables shallbe grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70 and local requirements and practices.

2.14 BASIS OF DESIGN

A. The Project Documents have been developed, in conjunction with the Owner, to establisha benchmark level of performance and reliability. The basis of design for the SCS systemis the Systimax solution by Commscope. Deviations from the basis of design (including


deviations for manufacturers stated herein as "acceptable" alternates) must be inaccordance with the substitution requirements of Section 17010. Use of an alternateproduct, whether or not it is stated as "acceptable" herein, does not relieve the Contractorof their responsibility to comply fully with the entirety of the Project Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Components of the premise distribution system shall be installed in a neat, workmanlikemanner consistent with the best telephone and data practices.

B. Wiring color codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform throughoutthe building.

C. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform.

D. T568A wiring codes as shown on the drawings shall standardize all twisted pair wiring.

E. Physical integrity of cables shall pass not only electronic testing but visual inspection aswell by the Owner and/or the Engineer.

3.2 CAT 6 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of Category 6 UTP cable shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA guidelines forCategory 6. Cable installation and terminations that do not comply shall be replaced by thecontractor.

1. The maximum pulling tension shall not exceed 25 pounds to avoid stretching theconductors. The contractor shall use a 25 lb breakaway swivel attached between thepull rope and the UTP CAT6 cable to ensure that no more than 25 lb of tension isexerted on the pulled cable.

2. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall not be less than 4x the outsidediameter of the cable.

3. The cable shall be installed without kinks or twists and the application of cable tiesshall not deform the cable bundle.

4. Strip back only as much cable jacket as is required to terminate the cable and theamount of untwisting in a pair as a result of the termination shall not exceed 0.5 in.

3.3 SERVICE SLACK

A. All CAT6 cable runs shall not contain service slack prior to the termination point at theworkstation side. Service slack at TR shall consist of a 10 foot slack section all stationcables located and placed neatly in the cable ladder above the equipment rack in anextended large diameter loops or in a loose figure 8 configuration.

3.4 SUPPORT AND ROUTING OF CABLES

A. Horizontal cables used in this system are to be installed within ceiling spaces. Cables shallbe routed through these spaces on approved cable support systems. Tie cables shall beextended between TR’S utilizing conduit runs as shown on the drawing.


B. Use of ceiling tiles, grid or hanger wires for support of SCS cables shall be prohibited.

C. The SCS system contractor shall install a complete set of supporting J-hooks and othersupporting hardware for this system as part of the SCS contract. All supporting hardwareshall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to installation. Hardware shall also beutilized by other systems work. Comply with basic layout indicated on drawing details forcable placement.


3.5 FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITION PENETRATIONS

A. Conduit sleeves shall be provided as a means of routing cables between variouscommunications rooms and multi floor buildings. Openings in sleeves and conduits usedfor the SCS system cables and those which remain (empty) spare shall be sealed with aU.L. approved fireproof, removable safing material.

B. Sleeves which pass vertically from floor to floor shall be sealed in a similar manner usingan approved re-enterable system. Penetration rating shall equal structure rating.

C. Additional penetrations through rated assemblies necessary for passage of SCS wiringshall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation ofcables.

D. Unless otherwise indicated on the contract documents provide Metallic Sleeve System forboth vertical and horizontal penetrations of fire barriers.

E. The contractor shall paste on the surface adjacent to each fire-proof penetration thedocumentation warning label. Use indelible ink to record your company name, the date,and the number of cables penetrating the fire barrier.

3.6 CROSS CONNECTS/PATCHING

A. All copper RJ45 / RJ45 Patching within Telecomm Rooms shall be performed by the SCScontractor.

B. All copper RJ45 / RJ45 Patching within Telecomm Rooms shall be performed by theOwner.

3.8 STRUCTURED CABLE SYSTEM PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION.

A. General: Contractor shall protect all Structured Cabling System materials from damageduring construction.

B. Racks and connecting hardware protection. Racks shall be covered with fabric or plasticafter mounting to prevent dust, debris and other foreign materials having contact with SCSdevices.

C. Cables: Contractor shall protect at all times all copper cables from damage duringinstallation. All cables shall maintain the physical integrity as manufactured for testing anddelivery to the owner. All damaged cables shall be replaced at no additional cost to theowner.

3.9 TRAINING

A. The contractor shall provide one 4 hour training session to familiarize the owner with thelocations of all TR’s, conduit/raceways routes, cable and jack labeling and numberingsystems, data and voice connections. The RCDD shall be present for and participate in notless than 2 hrs of user training.

3.10 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION


A. As-built documentation shall be provided as part of the contract. As-built drawings shall bea complete set of Autocad Release 2004 floor plans with all outlets shown and numberedas installed. The original project floor plan disks shall be obtained from the Owner. Allcable routings (trunk lines) and elevations of each TR or ER indicating outlet, tie, and risercable terminations shall be required. All addendum information or project revisionsresulting in drawing changes that occur during the construction period shall be documentedand included in the as-built material. All required as-built documentation is mandatory andshall be required prior to project closeout. A set of prints with all changes shall besubmitted to the Engineer for review. Upon completion of the Engineer's review, theContractor shall provide updated disks and a reproducible mylar set of drawings, whichinclude final As-built conditions and the Engineer's review comments, if any.

B. Voice/Data Matrix: The contractor shall provide in Excel software spreadsheet a matrix thatdefines the telecommunications outlet number, location, number of voice, data and specialjacks. This database shall also provide the outlet patch panel connection to the riser/inter-floor cable, equipment, and telephone company demarcation circuit pairs as part of the as-built documentation.

C. The project’s RCDD shall affix his/her stamp to the contractor’s as-built drawings,indicating that he/she has reviewed and approved the drawings as being complete,accurate, and representative of the system as actually installed.

3.11 TESTING OF COPPER CABLING

A. General: Horizontal and backbone cabling shall be tested in accordance withANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 clause 11, Cabling Transmission Performance and TestRequirements.

B. General: The SCS Contractor shall set the wiring tester for a channel configuration forDATA which includes the patch cord, patch panel, UTP Cable, work-area jack and work-area cord, and a permanent link configuration for VOICE.

C. General: In the event the Engineer elects to be present during the tests, provide notificationto the engineer two weeks prior to testing.

D. General: The Project’s RCDD shall sign off on all copper cable test results, indicating thathe/she was in responsible charge of all cable testing procedures and that all cables weretested in compliance with the contract documents and met or exceeded the requirementsstated herein.

E. General: The Owner may elect to conduct third party independent testing for all or part ofthe copper cabling. The contractor will be notified 4 weeks or earlier prior to testing. Thecontractor will be notified of those links and channels failing the third party testing forcorrective action, which may include replacement at no additional expense to the Owner.

F. Testing Equipment: Tester shall be as manufactured by Agilent, Fluke, IDEAL or Wavetek.Tester shall be 100% Level III compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA 568B.1 specifications fortesting of the CAT 6 cabling. No tester will be approved with out meeting theserequirements.


G. Each Data jack in each outlet shall be tested at a minimum to the CATEGORY 6compliance in a channel configuration to verify the integrity of all conductors and thecorrectness of the termination sequence. Testing shall be performed between work-areacord at the outlets and the patch cord at the equipment rack. Prior to Testing UTP runs, thetester shall be calibrated per manufacturer guidelines. The correct cable NVP shall beentered into tester to assure proper length and attenuation readings. During Channeltesting the patch cords and the work-area cords shall be the same as those provided bythe contractor per this specification. Each Channel test shall include one patch cord andone work-area cord, with no cord used twice.

H. Each Voice jack in each outlet shall be tested at a minimum to the CATEGORY 6compliance in a permanent Link configuration to verify the integrity of all conductors andthe correctness of the termination sequence. Testing shall be performed between work-area jack at the outlet and the jack at the patch panel. Prior to Testing UTP runs, the testershall be calibrated per manufacturer guidelines. The correct cable NVP shall be enteredinto tester to assure proper length and attenuation readings. During permanent Link testingcontractor shall use test adapters and test plugs recommended by the manufacturer of theconnectivity hardware. Generic cords/plugs shall not be used.

I. Documentation of cable testing shall be required. The SCS contractor shall provide theresults of all CATEGORY 6 cable tests in electronic format as well as two hard boundcopies in 3-ring binders. Provide text files on CD. Provide a separate text file for eachbuilding in the project. Each test page shall be separated by standard page break (one testper page). The test results shall include: 250 MHz sweep tests, continuity, polarity checks,wire map, Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, FEXT, PSFEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, ACR,Return Loss, Delay Skew, and the installed length for CATEGORY 6 cables. Cables notcomplying with the EIA/TIA 568B.1 CATEGORY 6 tests shall be identified to the engineerfor corrective action which may include replacement at no additional expense to the Owner.

J. Any Fail, Fail*, Pass* or WARNING test result yields a Fail for the channel or permanentlink under test. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, the result for each individualtest parameter must be Pass. All test results shall come from a tester with the permanentlyenabled marginal reporting feature.

K. Test results shall show and comply with the margin claimed by the manufacturers overcategory 6 channel and permanent link specifications on all transmission parametersacross the entire frequency range of 1-250 MHz as shown on the manufacturers catalogsand literature.

L. General: Copper Riser cabling for VOICE shall be tested for length, continuity, polaritychecks, wire map. The SCS Contractor shall provide the results of all Copper Riser cabletests in electronic format (CD).

M. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program andhave obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests.


N. CAT 6 patch cords testing: 100% of the CAT6 patch cords furnished for this project shallbe tested and shown to comply with the CAT6 cord requirements of TIA/EIA-568B.2.1,including wire map, NEXT, and return loss. Compliance must be proven by testing cordsalone, not by inserting cords into a channel. Cord performance may be measured on-siteusing either the TIA’s method or using a cord-test adapter to a handheld LAN cable tester.Alternatively, cord compliance may be proven by actual test reports supplied by the cordmanufacturer.


H. Per IEEE 802.3z, for Gigabit Ethernet, The maximum channel attenuation shall be:

Application Maximum Channel Attenuation (dB)62.5/125 um 50/125 um Singlemode

1000BASE-SX 3.2 3.9 -1000BASE-LX 4.0 3.5 4.7

3.13 ACCEPTANCE

A. General: The project shall be considered complete and ready to be turned over to theOwner after the completion of the following items:

1. Submission and Approval of all copper certified test reports.2. Submission of all written warranties.3. Delivery of final documentation.

END OF SECTION

BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS17450 - 1

SECTION 17450

BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1-GENERAL


A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to workspecified of this section.

B. General: For grounding electrode system and equipment grounding system forTelecommunications refer to specification section 16450. In all cases the applicableelectrical codes for grounding and bonding for telecommunications shall be met.

C. Supplemental: Refer to the specification sections identified below for additionalrequirements, which are supplemented by this section.

SECTION TITLE17010 TECHNOLOGY GENERAL PROVISIONS17110 PATHWAYS & SPACES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS17120 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM16450 GROUNDING17779 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEMS17810 SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEMS17820 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEMS

D. General. The bonding approach required herein is intended to work in concert with thecabling topology as specified in Specification section 17120 and installed inaccordance with specification section 17110.

E. Reference Standards:

1. J - STD - 607-A2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-6065. NEMA6. UL 1863 Communication Circuit Accessories7. UL-50 & UL-5148. NFPA 70 – NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE9. IEEE Std. 1100-1992, Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment.10. BICSI TDMM, Telecommunications Distribution Method Manual.11. UL 144912. NFPA 780


F. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) The TMGB serves as thededicated extension of the building grounding electrode system for thetelecommunications infrastructure. The TMGB shall be located and provided as shownon electrical the drawings. The TMGB must have minimum dimensions of 6.3 mm(0.25 in) thick by 100 mm (4 in) wide, and be variable in length. The TMGB must alsobe listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL).

G. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB). The TGBs are the groundingconnection points for telecommunications systems and equipments in the area servedby that telecommunications room or equipment room. The TGBs shall be located andprovided as shown on the electrical drawings. The TGBs must have minimumdimensions of 6.3 mm (0.25 in) thick by 50 mm (2 in) wide, and be variable in length.The TMGB must also be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL).

H. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BC). The Bonding Conductor fortelecommunications shall bond the TMGB to the service equipment (power) ground,the building steel structure and all metallic raceways and hardware within thetelecommunications rooms.

I. The BC shall be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximumof 3/0 AWG. The BC may be insulated. However, If the BC is insulated, the insulationshall meet the fire ratings of its pathway and shall be listed for the space in which it isintended to be placed, such as CM, CMR or CMP. The sizing of the BC is not intendedto account for the reduction or control of electromagnetic interference.

BC LENGTH LINEAR M (FT) BC SIZE (AWG)

Less than 4 (13) 64 – 6 (14 – 20) 46 – 8 (21 – 26) 3

8 – 10 (27 – 33) 210 – 13 (34 – 41) 113 – 16 (42 – 52) 1/016 – 20 (53 – 66) 2/0

Greater than 20 (66) 3/0

J. The BC for Telecommunications is not intended to serve as the only conductorproviding a ground fault current return path. The intended function of the BondingConductor for Telecommunications is to equalize potential differences betweentelecommunications systems.

PART 2-PRODUCTS

2.1 BONDING MATERIALS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

A. General: As specified on specifications section 16450 and as shown on T drawings.


PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

A. General: Specification section 16450 applies to work of this section. Installationrequirements specified herein takes precedence over specification section 16450.

B. The BC shall be installed and protected from physical and mechanical damage.

C. The BC shall be continuous and routed in the shortest possible straight line path.

D. The BC shall be installed without splices. Where splices are necessary, the number ofsplices should be a minimum and they shall be accessible and located withintelecommunications spaces. Joined segments of a BC shall be connected usingexothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. All jointsshall be adequately supported and protected from damage.

E. Connections of the BC to the TGB or TMGB shall utilize exothermic weld connections,listed compression two hole lugs or other irreversible compression type connector.

F. The TGB or TMGB shall be as close to the electrical power panel as is practicable andshall be installed to maintain clearances required by applicable electrical codes. Thatelectrical power panel bus or the panel enclosure shall be bonded to the TGB orTMGB.

G. The TGBs and TMGB shall be insulated from their support. A minimum of 50 mm (2inches) separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of thebusbar.

H. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall be listed for theintended purpose.

I. The primary protector grounding conductor shall be connected to the TMGB or TGB. Aminimum of 300 mm (1 FT) separation shall be maintained between this insulatedconductor and any dc power cables, switchboard cable, or high frequency cables,even when placed in rigid metal conduit or EMT.

J. When the outside plant cables in the Telecommunications Entrance Facility roomincorporate a cable shield isolation gap, the cable shield on the building side of the gapshall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB.

K. Where backbone cables incorporate a shield or metallic member, this shield or metallicmember shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB.

L. Telecommunications primary protectors for the interbuilding backbone cables shall bebonded to the TMGB or TGB.

M. Short metallic pathways (e.g. wall and floor sleeves) are not required to be bonded.

END OF SECTION